Delete butlast, nbutlast.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d9c9b920 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-10-12
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e 29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
8628686a
DL
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
31build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
32necessary changes to unexec.
f4988be7 33
d9c9b920
DL
34** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
35new display features described below.
36
e90813b8 37** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 38all of the new display features described below. The port currently
d69aa2e3
EZ
39lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the
40"Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the
41description of aspects specific to the Mac.
d9c9b920 42
1fa28578
GM
43\f
44* Changes in Emacs 21.1
45
8416e94a
DL
46** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face
47symbol, not double-quoted.
48
2a64f8c2 49** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future
8416e94a
DL
50version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline,
51rnews, rnewspost. Their implementations have been moved to
52lisp/obsolete.
2a64f8c2 53
22adbe54
DL
54+++
55** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding
56system for keyboard input.
57
eb1b0c74
GM
58+++
59** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
60to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
61
7495f7ca
EZ
62+++
63** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces Emacs to behave
64as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. This comes handy
65with mice that don't report their number of buttons correctly. One
66example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, but clicks on the
67middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version of Emacs.
68
1636ca09 69+++
a01cfb77
GM
70** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
71changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
72buffer by default.
73
c607d53d 74** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
346598f1 75trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
c607d53d
SS
76this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
77
4104194e
GM
78** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
79be added to the end of the buffer because of `require-final-newline'.
80
c6f01e00
MB
81** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
82To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
83`auto-compression-mode' command.
84
4c724b32
DL
85** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
86`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
87
b856f39c 88+++
068127d6
GM
89** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
90operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
91
fd06c7da
MB
92** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
93(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
94remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
95may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
96
8ac08dea 97+++
62c273d7
DL
98** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
99is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
100
101+++
102** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
103mode `iswitchb-mode'.
104
8ac08dea 105+++
f393cf90
DL
106** Gnus changes.
107
108The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
109four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
110internationalization and mail-fetching.
111
112*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
113many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
114
115If you used procmail like in
116
117(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
118(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
119(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
120(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
121
327652be 122this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
123
124(setq mail-sources
125 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
126 :suffix ".in")))
127
128More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
129Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
130
131*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
132Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
31446945
KH
133Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no
134longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
135
657706fa
DL
136The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to
137use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was
138installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier.
f393cf90 139
60dd7e0e 140*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
141parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
142are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
143now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
144
145*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
146called to position point.
147
148*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
149summary buffers and NOV files.
150
151*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
152of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
153
154*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
155subtly different manner.
156
157*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
158and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
159ever-changing layouts.
160
161*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
162
72190b84 163*** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
f393cf90
DL
164
165** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1668859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
167more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
168empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
169window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
170on.
171
ba9eeda1
GM
172** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
173set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
174file that is already visited under a different name.
175
42ac0ae5
GM
176** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
177nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
178
179** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
180recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
181signaled.
182
ba9eeda1 183** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
184support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
185use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
186buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
187M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
188new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
189
b941a14b 190+++
ba9eeda1 191** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 192and displays information about that.
b941a14b 193
ba9eeda1 194** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
195file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
196
5e56e175
GM
197** Polish, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card
198have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `de-refcard.tex' and
199`fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included.
d7b38c05 200
657706fa
DL
201** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available.
202
d7b38c05 203** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
5e56e175
GM
204`dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in
205`fr-drdref.tex'.
d7b38c05 206
25ad1371
GM
207** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
208expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
209
210This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
211determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
212mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
213interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
214regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
215associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
216
b856f39c 217+++
f0298744
DL
218** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
219displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
220menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
221menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
222
9a8d84ca
DL
223** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
224a version-dependent component.
225
5f368d29
GM
226** The new user-option `delete-key-deletes-forward' can be set to
227let the Delete function key delete forward instead of backward.
228
229On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen
230according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace
231key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the
232option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to
233delete backward, and Delete can be used used to delete forward
234
235If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes
236a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the
237Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via
238`keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on
239the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting if you don't
240have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys.
241
242Programmatically, you can call function
243delete-key-deletes-forward-mode to toggle the behavior of the Delete
244key.
d76c03ea 245
3b4fa1b2
DL
246** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
247using that menu.
248
40e857ea 249** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 250suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 251
beb2eb00 252+++
c08398de
DL
253** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
254buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
255contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
256by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
257insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
258the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
259Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
260
db7a3ede 261+++
3d6cd763
GM
262** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
263coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
264escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
265such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
266recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 267always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 268read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
269(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
270RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 271
0b8a3a6d
DL
272** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
273environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
274
424d8b44 275+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
276** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
277point in a pop-up window.
278
6d35b49f 279+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
280** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
281displays all characters in that character set.
282
283** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
284coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
285
a4067978 286+++
5cb6a58e 287** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978 288on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
a5e350c9
SM
289defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
290commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5cb6a58e 291
424d8b44 292+++
a1b8d58b
GM
293** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
294
6e417ca5
DL
295** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
296been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
297
424d8b44 298+++
5898e075
DL
299** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
300`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
301indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
302indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
303
424d8b44 304+++
abfcc168
GM
305** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
306sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 307(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
308You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
309
424d8b44 310+++
cc181e95
GM
311** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
312on the display using several methods
313
424d8b44 314+++
cc181e95
GM
315- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
316a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
317be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
318
424d8b44 319+++
cc181e95 320- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
5820dead 321equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
cc181e95 322
da4496b6 323- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
324
325- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
326the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
327
424d8b44 328+++
3b4fa1b2 329** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 330an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 331command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 332does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 333
424d8b44 334+++
176256a1 335** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
336`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
337typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 338
dd0add8e
DL
339** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
340characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
341
bf3ba9ac 342+++
699238d9
GM
343** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
344compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
345this behavior.
346
347The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
348compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
349Emacs dump core.
350
424d8b44 351+++
699238d9 352** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 353
7233c5bd
GM
354*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
355whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
356is useful for debugging X problems.
357
358Example:
359
699238d9 360 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 361
100b3cbb
GM
362*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
363visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
364the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
365and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
366visual class names are
367
368 TrueColor
369 PseudoColor
370 DirectColor
371 StaticColor
372 GrayScale
373 StaticGray
374
375Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
376`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
377meaning.
378
379The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
380supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
381`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
382visual.
383
384Example:
385
699238d9 386 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
387
388*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
389specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
390default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
391resource values are `true' or `on'.
392
393Example:
394
699238d9 395 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 396
0d0c76b8
EZ
397** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
398more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
399now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
400
e921a911 401+++
42088c12 402** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 403display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
404shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
405be customized.
c60ea02e 406
424d8b44 407+++
31047e0d
DL
408** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
409
424d8b44 410+++
b02786f9
GM
411** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
412all frames except the selected one.
413
3261c1d8
DL
414** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
415to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
416
ffe36136 417** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
418the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
419MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
420displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
421
0292b49f 422+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
423** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
424MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 425
559cee90
DL
426** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
427read mail from the menu etc.
428
480b5773 429+++
271b4185
GM
430** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
431a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
432
0daee095
GM
433** Changes in Texinfo mode.
434
a5e350c9 435*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
0daee095
GM
436macros
437
438 Key binding Macro
439 -------------------------
440 C-c C-c C-s @strong
441 C-c C-c C-e @emph
105602b1 442 C-c C-c u @uref
0daee095 443 C-c C-c q @quotation
105602b1 444 C-c C-c m @email
a5e350c9
SM
445 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
446 M-RET @item
447
448*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
0daee095 449
559cee90
DL
450** Changes in Outline mode.
451
452There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
453`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
454the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
455
327652be 456** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 457
c0a8c108
EZ
458+++
459*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
460with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
461are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
462Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
463buffers to kill, as before.
464
465Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 466i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
467this way.
468
956777b3
GM
469** Changes to Show Paren mode.
470
471*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
472The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
473use. Default is 1000.
474
f6989277 475+++
404fa7d6
DL
476** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
477groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
478
424d8b44
DL
479+++
480** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
481M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
482M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
483buffers.
8964fec7 484
424d8b44 485+++
39783d73
WP
486** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
487under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
488.emacs file.
489
490The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
491determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
492
d35fce81
GM
493** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
494abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
495`directory-abbrev-alist'.
496
a933dad1
DL
497** Faces and frame parameters.
498
499There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
500Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
501`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
502`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
503sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
504for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
505parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
506
507Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
508`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 509`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
510`default' face and vice versa.
511
d80061fa 512+++
f77a4a8a
GM
513** New face `menu'.
514
515The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
516Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
517attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
518
424d8b44 519+++
a933dad1
DL
520** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
521
522The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
523colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
524correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
525the screen gamma of a frame's display.
526
527PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
528in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
529color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
530
531The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
532`ScreenGamma'.
533
534** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
535
536The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
537Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
538oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
539of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
540the text.
541
542** Emacs has a new face implementation.
543
544The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
545font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
546height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
547These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
548specify a font.
549
550Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
551These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
552under Lisp changes, below.
553
7f90b826 554** New default font is Courier 12pt under X.
a933dad1 555
424d8b44
DL
556+++
557** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
558of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
559otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
560
561** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
562truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
563foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
564customizing face `fringe'.
565
8d0f00fd
MB
566** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
567You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
568
569The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
570versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil,
571and its use is deprecated.
a933dad1
DL
572
573** LessTif support.
574
424d8b44
DL
575Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
576You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
577
578** Toolkit scroll bars.
579
580Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
581LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
582configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
583bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
584bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
585Emacs.
586
587When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
588Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
589Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
590Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
591define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
592`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
593
594Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
595a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
596directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
597different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
598system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
599add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
600
601The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
602`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
603This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
604image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
605Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
606
607** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
608
609When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
610widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
611Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
612
424d8b44 613+++
a933dad1
DL
614** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
615
616When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
617whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
618defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
619highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
620displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
621whitespace.
622
6e612d4d 623+++
a933dad1
DL
624** Busy-cursor.
625
626Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
627display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
628
424d8b44 629+++
a933dad1
DL
630** Blinking cursor
631
632M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
633terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
634and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
635the group `cursor'.
636
8ac08dea 637+++
a933dad1
DL
638** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
639
640This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
641generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
642See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
643details.
644
645Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
646have to do anything to activate it.
647
648** Tabs and variable-width text.
649
650Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
651defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
652independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
653Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
654
655** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
656
424d8b44 657+++
a933dad1
DL
658*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
659
660 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
661
79dd1637
RS
662The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
663LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 664
79dd1637
RS
665*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
666LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 667
34d90e29 668+++
a933dad1
DL
669** Hscrolling in C code.
670
cc181e95
GM
671Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
672`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
673customized.
a933dad1 674
03ff8aab
GM
675If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or
676scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound
677for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll
678the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more
679to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc.
680
8ac08dea 681+++
a933dad1
DL
682** Tool bar support.
683
684Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
685of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
686changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
b97cd2cc
DL
687displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
688if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
689icons will be used.
690
691To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
692for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would
693also be useful manually to touch up some of the PBM icons.
a933dad1 694
424d8b44 695+++
a933dad1
DL
696** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
697
698Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
699mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
700line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
701about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
702in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
703
704Currently, the following actions have been defined:
705
706- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
707buffers.
708
709- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
710M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
711
712- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
713
424d8b44
DL
714- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
715`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
716
717- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
718
719** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
720
721When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 722from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
723non-nil.
724
725** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
726
727Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
728Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
729the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
730italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
731Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
732attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
733on terminals.
a933dad1 734
54a9404d
EZ
735The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
736supported on character terminals.
737
a933dad1
DL
738** Sound support
739
2f516940 740Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 741driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 742supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 743
424d8b44 744+++
a933dad1
DL
745** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
746the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
747forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
748value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
749users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
750even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
751
752The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
753
0e18b431 754+++
a933dad1
DL
755** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
756
757As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
758drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
759`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
760
fdd8bb68 761+++
a933dad1
DL
762** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
763bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
764
765This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
766`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
767variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
768
c5d00c64 769+++
a933dad1
DL
770** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
771
772When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
d9e66103 773value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
a933dad1 774number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 775fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
776
777When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
778value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
779number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 780fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
781
782** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
783notably at the end of lines.
784
785All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
786spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
787
424d8b44 788+++
eee54b0e
DL
789There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
790
a933dad1
DL
791** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
792query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
793after each match to get the replacement text.
794
00782214 795+++
d5483ab1
GM
796** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
797you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 798
424d8b44 799** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
800you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
801lisp-complete-symbol.
802
7af69644 803+++
a933dad1
DL
804** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
805
163ea954 806If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
a299a6f0
GM
807longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
808is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
809minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
a933dad1
DL
810
811- User option: max-mini-window-height
812
813Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
814fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
a299a6f0 815specifies a number of lines.
a933dad1
DL
816
817Default is 0.25.
818
a299a6f0
GM
819- User option: resize-mini-windows
820
821How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
5820dead 822resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
a299a6f0
GM
823grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
824again.
825
826Default is `grow-only'.
827
2f72fd2f
GM
828** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
829
0d43b60d
GM
830** Changes to hideshow.el
831
832Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
833selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
834conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
835
836*** Generalized block selection and traversal
837
838A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
839(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
840which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
841`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
842point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
843(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
844
845If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
846i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
847backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
848the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
849
850*** Isearch support for updating mode line
851
852During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
853blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
854line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
855portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
856is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
857
858To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
859something like this in your .emacs.
860
861 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
862 (lambda ()
863 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
864
327652be
TTN
865*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
866
867Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
868header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
869`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
870moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
871block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
872behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
873useful.
874
875You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
876function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
877of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
878code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
879appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
880
881(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
882 (hs-hide-level 1)
883 (forward-sexp 1))
884(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
885
886The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
887emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
888only for code blocks.
889
890*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
891
892Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
893parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
894display for implementation.
895
896*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
897
898The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
899LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
900which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
901new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
902
903 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
904 hs-show-block C-c C-s
905 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
906 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
907 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
908 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
909 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
910
911These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
912
559cee90
DL
913** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
914
424d8b44 915+++
1b24b888
GM
916*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
917an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
918log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
919
424d8b44 920+++
1b24b888
GM
921**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
922current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
923
924+++
1b24b888
GM
925*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
926in a log file.
eb2aac9d 927
502004be 928+++
1b24b888
GM
929*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
930entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 931
502004be 932+++
1b24b888 933*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
934version number is performed based on regular expressions from
935`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
936Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 937
2c63c979 938*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 939
79c78e77
GM
940** Changes to cmuscheme
941
942*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
943`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
944
3476b54a
GM
945** Changes in Font Lock
946
947*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
a5e350c9 948font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
3476b54a 949
2c63c979
SM
950*** multiline patterns are now supported.
951
a5e350c9
SM
952*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
953the face used for each string/comment.
c607d53d 954
601e0081
SM
955*** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
956Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
957
b3b98592
GM
958** Comint (subshell) changes
959
988cded7
MB
960These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
961include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
962
963*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
964to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
965parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
966user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
967this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
968respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
969feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
970`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
971
972*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
973and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
974
988cded7 975*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
976buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
977buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
978
979The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
980M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
981the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
982
988cded7
MB
983*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
984and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
985see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 986
988cded7 987*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
988saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
989argument, it appends to the file.
990
988cded7 991*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
992(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
993compatibility.
994
0e40b809
EL
995*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
996ring (history).
d648cc45 997
fe5d5d8c 998*** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for
6dde6abc
GM
999identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp
1000strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#".
fe5d5d8c 1001
e26cec67
GM
1002** Changes to Rmail mode
1003
b97cd2cc 1004*** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
c0510d27
GM
1005set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
1006receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
1007recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
1008`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
1009as correspondent.
1010
1011Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
1012mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 1013regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 1014
3b55acc9
GM
1015*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
1016to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
1017Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
1018with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
1019for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
1020
6a1950ec
GM
1021*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
1022like `j'.
1023
5bb6f079
RS
1024*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
1025specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 1026digest message.
e26cec67 1027
993d8b7d
DL
1028*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
1029in which folder to put messages automatically.
1030
400a1ed0
GM
1031** Changes to TeX mode
1032
a5e350c9 1033*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
400a1ed0
GM
1034`latex-mode'.
1035
a5e350c9
SM
1036*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
1037
1038*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
1039
1040*** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
c607d53d 1041
a933dad1
DL
1042** Changes to RefTeX mode
1043
1044*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
1045 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
1046 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
1047 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
1048 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
1049 can be edited from that buffer.
1050
1051*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
1052 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
1053 `A' to use all marked entries).
1054
1055*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
1056 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
1057
1058*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
1059 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
1060 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
1061 been cited.
1062
38de9631
GM
1063** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
1064The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
1065semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
1066in column 1 are always made leaves.
1067
a933dad1
DL
1068** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
1069has the following new features:
1070
1071*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
1072may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
1073to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
1074time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
1075
1076*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
1077feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1078file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1079compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1080pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1081defaults to 1.
1082
5d94f558 1083** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
1084file names.
1085
424d8b44 1086+++
a933dad1
DL
1087** Tooltips.
1088
1089Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
01242779
DL
1090mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
1091turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
a933dad1
DL
1092
1093Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
1094variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
1095the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
1096tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1097
424d8b44 1098+++
a933dad1
DL
1099** Customize changes
1100
1101*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
1102`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
1103cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1104
1105*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1106Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1107default).
1108
0ae51efb
GM
1109*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1110between custom options. Example:
1111
1112 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1113 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1114 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1115 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1116 :group 'mule
1117 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1118 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1119
1120This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1121current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1122first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1123
a933dad1
DL
1124** New features in evaluation commands
1125
5e03eb84 1126*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1127modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1128print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1129customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1130eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1131
5e03eb84
GM
1132*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1133code when called with a prefix argument.
1134
ead53494
GM
1135** Ispell changes
1136
37d8a691 1137+++
bbe15990
EZ
1138*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1139transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1140spell-checks the current buffer.
1141
37d8a691 1142+++
385ff9e3
GM
1143*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1144added.
1145
1146*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1147correction is made and re-checked.
1148
74ec6045 1149*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1150
1151*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1152cases.
1153
1154*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1155on syntax errors.
1156
1157*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1158end of the buffer.
1159
a933dad1
DL
1160** Dired changes
1161
1162*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1163command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1164is, delete only empty directories.
1165
1166*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1167command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1168copy directories recursively.
1169
f6737cde
GM
1170*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1171in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1172the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1173
2f72fd2f
GM
1174*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1175replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1176directory.
1177
7381ae05
MB
1178*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1179a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1180This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1181will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1182accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1183
e024b101
GM
1184*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1185from ls switches.
1186
60b392a7
MB
1187*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1188of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1189which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1190source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1191
a933dad1
DL
1192** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1193use the -f option when sending mail.
1194
b1c609b1
GM
1195** CC mode changes.
1196
1197Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1198current user setups (although it's believed that these
1199incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1200However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1201back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1202compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1203release.
1204
7972fcfc
GM
1205*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1206This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1207of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1208non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1209want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1210have to bother.
1211
1212Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1213situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1214and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1215If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1216the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1217by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1218
b1c609b1
GM
1219*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1220When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1221variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1222take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1223is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1224settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1225possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1226Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1227
1228By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1229special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1230the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1231of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1232above.
1233
1234Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1235when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1236function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1237call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1238then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1239values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1240only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1241function documentation for more info.
1242
1243The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1244especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1245with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1246intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1247such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1248is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1249configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1250global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1251
1252(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1253
1254**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1255This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1256
1257This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1258variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1259completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1260the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1261empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1262style system.
1263
1264**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1265In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1266c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1267as far as possible.
1268
1269*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1270CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1271surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1272chapter about this in the manual.
1273
1274**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1275The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1276recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1277primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1278adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1279
1280**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1281This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1282c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1283
1284**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1285This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1286
1287It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1288Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1289A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1290inside CC Mode.
1291
1292Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1293causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1294the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1295available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1296cc-mode/).
1297
1298**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1299The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1300specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1301literals.
1302
1303**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1304It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1305prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1306you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1307this function.
1308
1309*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1310It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1311to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1312struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1313Thanks to Eric Eide.
1314
1315*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1316It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1317opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1318
1319**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1320
1321*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1322See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1323better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1324and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1325
1326*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1327previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1328the column specified by comment-column.
1329
1330*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1331In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1332is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1333prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1334contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1335don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1336
1337*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1338instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1339arguments.
1340
1341*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1342
1343*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1344c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1345c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1346variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1347Provan).
1348
1349*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1350
c407c570
GM
1351** Makefile mode changes
1352
1353*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1354
5d94f558 1355*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1356Fontlock mode is active.
1357
87be76f6
GM
1358** Isearch changes
1359
3353ef5a
GM
1360*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1361so that searches can be resumed.
1362
1363*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1364respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1365that started the search.
1366
87be76f6 1367*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1368selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1369
c8a8458a 1370+++
87be76f6
GM
1371*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1372
d35fce81 1373Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1374`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1375search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1376before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1377highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1378`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1379
1380The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1381will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1382Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1383using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1384usual snappy response.
1385
1386If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1387matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1388set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1389isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1390
21bc6203 1391+++
35384f06
GM
1392** Changes in sort.el
1393
1394The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1395as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1396new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1397numeric base.
87be76f6 1398
d7b511c4
GM
1399** Changes to Ange-ftp
1400
424d8b44 1401+++
d7b511c4 1402*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1403names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1404sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1405
d7b511c4
GM
1406*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1407ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1408
9d453139
SS
1409*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1410output ^M at the end of lines.
1411
4b9347b3
GM
1412** Shell script mode changes.
1413
1414Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1415derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1416sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1417
79214ddf
FP
1418** Etags changes.
1419
1420*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1421
aca0be23 1422*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1423possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1424{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1425This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1426a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1427
79214ddf
FP
1428*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1429declarations when given the --declarations option.
1430
1431*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1432"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1433
1434*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1435types.
1436
de370c4c 1437*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1438
1439*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1440
1441*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1442are now tagged.
1443
1444*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1445variables are tagged.
1446
1447*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1448
8dc78b52
FP
1449*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1450for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1451
c8d94f86 1452+++
f6737cde
GM
1453** Changes in etags.el
1454
3f6e4b8b
GM
1455*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1456tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1457is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1458
f6737cde
GM
1459*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1460the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1461
1462If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1463FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1464TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1465obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1466
1467TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1468
1469FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1470List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1471
1472A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1473
1474 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1475 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1476 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1477
1478*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1479of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1480
1481*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1482names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1483
0c68ce6f
GM
1484*** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself.
1485If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c
1486/tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c",
1487"dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the filename,
1488point will go to the beginning of the file.
1489
424d8b44 1490+++
fbc164de
PE
1491** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1492and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1493LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1494
c3eb1f10 1495+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1496** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1497Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
14988859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1499GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
15008859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1501releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1502(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1503
424d8b44 1504+++
163ea954 1505** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1506remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1507appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1508
1509** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1510
424d8b44 1511+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1512** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1513
6ab8d72d 1514+++
f6499c03 1515** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1516containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1517expression from that list, are not checked.
1518
5d94f558
SS
1519** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1520When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1521and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1522the buffer, just like for the local files.
1523
dc28878c
GM
1524** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1525
df8a9f78 1526+++
95931eb1
GM
1527** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1528displays local abbrevs, only.
1529
54baed30
GM
1530** VC Changes
1531
1532VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1533easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1534Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1535to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1536changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1537`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1538version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1539each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1540file is registered in that backend.
1541
1542When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1543backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1544directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1545master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1546the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1547As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1548
1549The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1550still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1551RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1552vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1553where it doesn't make sense.)
1554
1555The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1556obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1557`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1558
1559*** General Changes
1560
1561The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1562checks are always done now.
1563
327652be 1564VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1565operations.
1566
c286608e
SM
1567`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1568`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1569`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1570
22933be8
AS
1571The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1572first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1573current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1574the working file (``merge news'').
1575
1576The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1577(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1578downwards.
1579
1580*** Multiple Backends
1581
1582VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1583useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1584repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1585commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1586local RCS archives.
1587
1588To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1589should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1590backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1591`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1592
1593If you have a file registered in one backend already, you can register
1594it in a second one by using C-x v i (vc-register) again.
1595Alternatively, you can commit changes to another backend (say, RCS),
1596by typing C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a
1597backend name as a revision number). When using the latter approach,
1598VC registers the file in the more local backend if that hasn't already
1599happened, and commits to a branch based on the current revision number
1600from the more remote backend.
1601
1602If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1603another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1604any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1605pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1606
1607After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1608changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1609local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1610buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1611
54baed30
GM
1612*** Changes for CVS
1613
1614There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1615default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1616remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1617by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1618regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1619that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1620queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1621
22933be8
AS
1622If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1623repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1624revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1625any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1626backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1627number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1628(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1629of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1630the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
105602b1
EZ
1631automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
1632since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
1633name.)
22933be8 1634
54baed30
GM
1635If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1636repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1637If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
22933be8 1638commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
54baed30
GM
1639current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1640entire directory tree.
1641
1642The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1643"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1644is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1645"watched" by other developers.)
1646
22933be8
AS
1647The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1648(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
1649an empty argument to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
1650starting at the given directory.
1651
54baed30
GM
1652*** Lisp Changes in VC
1653
1654VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1655add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1656library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1657then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1658a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1659provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1660of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1661you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1662`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1663
a933dad1
DL
1664** New modes and packages
1665
79b9f6e0
MB
1666*** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'
1667automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when
1668the default is not applicable.
1669
b95b34e5
GM
1670*** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1671rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1672shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1673
1674Features are:
1675
1676- Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1677 drawn, like this: | \ /
c607d53d 1678 --+-- X
b95b34e5
GM
1679 | / \
1680
1681- Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1682 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1683 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1684 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1685 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1686 you are drawing.
1687
1688- Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1689 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1690
1691- Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1692 flood-filling.
1693
1694- Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1695 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1696 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1697 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
c607d53d 1698
b95b34e5
GM
1699- Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1700 also do without the mouse.
1701
1702- Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1703 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1704 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1705 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1706 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1707
1708- Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1709
1710 lines straight-lines
1711 rectangles squares
1712 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1713 ellipses circles
1714 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1715 spray-can setting size for spraying
1716 vaporize line vaporize lines
1717 erase characters erase rectangles
1718
1719 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1720 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1721 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1722 drawing.
1723
1724 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1725 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1726 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1727 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1728
1729- Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1730 can be turned off).
1731
4473cdd9
JW
1732+++
1733*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1734implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1735It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1736functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1737history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1738will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1739the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1740rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1741all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1742
ff332647 1743+++
90cbf47e
GM
1744*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1745intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1746typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1747on certain projects.
1748
894ca69e 1749+++
90cbf47e 1750*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1751regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1752
d96d6bb0 1753 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1754
1755will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1756face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1757typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1758Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1759appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1760current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1761corresponding file is read.
1762
424d8b44 1763+++
d96d6bb0 1764*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1765Emacs is idle.
1766
31fc5d15
GM
1767*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1768parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1769
5cb6a58e
SM
1770*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1771package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1772be more robust while offering the same functionality.
601e0081
SM
1773`comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
1774comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
5cb6a58e 1775
424d8b44 1776+++
578979ee
GM
1777*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1778facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1779separate Texinfo file.
1780
424d8b44
DL
1781+++
1782*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1783by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1784provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1785`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1786enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1787
424d8b44 1788+++
6abca616
EZ
1789*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1790without invoking external programs.
1791
1792The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1793and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1794`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1795is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1796Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1797
1798The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1799page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1800
719e2c6e 1801+++
5e5dff44
GM
1802*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1803authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1804
1805The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1806the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1807the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1808Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1809even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1810single step.
1811
1812On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1813matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1814probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1815contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1816
424d8b44 1817+++
f7136ee8
GM
1818*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1819unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1820actually modifying content of a buffer.
1821
bbd9b566
GM
1822*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1823PostScript.
1824
1825Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1826
1827The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1828
1829 ; comment (until end of line)
1830 A non-terminal
1831 "C" terminal
1832 ?C? special
1833 $A default non-terminal
1834 $"C" default terminal
1835 $?C? default special
1836 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1837 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1838 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1839 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1840 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1841 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1842 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1843 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1844 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1845 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1846 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1847 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1848 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1849 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1850 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1851
1852Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1853
99453a38
GM
1854*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1855align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1856determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1857example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1858equal signs of assignments.
1859
424d8b44 1860+++
559cee90
DL
1861*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1862paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1863
424d8b44 1864+++
6448a6b3
GM
1865*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1866list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1867buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1868customize the package.
1869
6344985d
GM
1870*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1871
249652b1
GM
1872*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1873replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1874is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1875and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1876not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1877which answers different needs.
1878
424d8b44 1879+++
3476b54a
GM
1880*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1881suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1882expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1883course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1884reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1885to be enabled.
1886
424d8b44 1887+++
8964fec7
SM
1888*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1889containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1890
424d8b44 1891+++
a933dad1
DL
1892*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1893
424d8b44 1894+++
a933dad1
DL
1895*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1896
1897*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1898
8901d1ac
GM
1899Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1900`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1901disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1902`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1903displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1904and background colors.
1905
a933dad1
DL
1906*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1907Pascal) language.
1908
f6499c03 1909+++
a933dad1
DL
1910*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1911the text at point.
1912
1913*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1914
424d8b44 1915+++
8d54eb69
DL
1916*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1917
a933dad1
DL
1918*** whitespace.el ???
1919
ebcfda83
GM
1920*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1921files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1922(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1923interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1924often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1925uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1926codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1927
1928*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1929
1930Here is an example of columns:
1931
1932horse apple bus
1933dog pineapple car EXTRA
1934porcupine strawberry airplane
1935
1936Doing the following settings:
1937
1938 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1939 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1940 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1941 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1942
1943
1944Selecting the lines above and typing:
1945
1946 M-x delimit-columns-region
1947
1948It results:
1949
1950[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1951[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1952[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1953
1954delim-col has the following options:
1955
1956 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1957 before all columns.
1958
1959 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1960 between each column.
1961
1962 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1963 after all columns.
1964
1965 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1966 each column.
1967
1968delim-col has the following commands:
1969
1970 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1971 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1972
424d8b44 1973+++
f507826c 1974*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1975were operated on recently.
1976
1977M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1978
31fc5d15
GM
1979M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1980recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1981
31fc5d15
GM
1982M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1983filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1984file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1985
31fc5d15
GM
1986- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1987- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1988- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1989
31fc5d15
GM
1990The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1991dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1992
8062f458
DL
1993*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1994text.
1995
424d8b44 1996+++
36e24b82 1997*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1998of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1999specific to Message mode.
2000
424d8b44 2001+++
36e24b82
DL
2002*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
2003viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
2004with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
2005
424d8b44 2006+++
aaa659ef
DL
2007*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
2008interface to access directory servers using different directory
2009protocols. It has a separate manual.
2010
eee54b0e
DL
2011*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
2012for Autoconf, selected automatically.
2013
424d8b44 2014+++
612839b6
GM
2015*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
2016
5d94f558 2017*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 2018minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 2019
399da7e3
DL
2020*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
2021with the diary features.
2022
6e417ca5
DL
2023*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
2024numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
2025
4a27bdfb
GM
2026*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
2027Fill mode.
2028
60dd7e0e
DL
2029*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
2030Gnus facilities.
2031
dace60cf
JW
2032*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
2033facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
2034difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
2035they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 2036
965bc065
DL
2037+++
2038** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
2039paragraphs filled as you modify them.
2040
2041+++
2042** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
2043to be visited as images.
2044
a933dad1
DL
2045** Withdrawn packages
2046
2047*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
2048functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 2049
3261c1d8
DL
2050*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
2051
2052*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
2053
2054\f
01242779
DL
2055* Incompatible Lisp changes
2056
2057There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
2058may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
2059
2060** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
2061`(format %s foo)' no longer works to remove properties.
2062
2063** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
2064which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
2065may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
2066these properties are active.
2067
4dd4cc14 2068** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
01242779 2069ranges may affect some code.
1c14ba45
DL
2070
2071** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
2072buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
2073make a difference to some code.
2074
4dd4cc14
DL
2075** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
2076operates on the minibuffer.
2077
7c94ccf6
EZ
2078** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2079cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
2080different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
2081(previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
2082Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
2083character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
2084multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
2085encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
2086reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
2087sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
2088a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
2089the buffer as multibyte characters.
2090
2091Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
2092MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
2093appropriate for reading truly binary files.
2094
7a39158f
DL
2095** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and
2096`after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail.
2097
2098** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as
2099long promised.
2100
2a64f8c2
DL
2101** `scroll-left' and `scroll-right' are only effective when
2102`automatic-hscrolling' is nil.
2103
01242779 2104\f
ce75fd23
GM
2105* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
2106(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
2107
eb1b0c74
GM
2108+++
2109** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
2110to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
2111
52d89894
GM
2112+++
2113** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
2114alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
2115
693c4692 2116** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
4301cf66 2117
1c14ba45 2118+++
6bc92b2e
GM
2119** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
2120deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
2121being deleted.
2122
1c14ba45 2123+++
39e776cd
SM
2124** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
2125
a18a342d 2126+++
1396138a 2127** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
2128If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
2129skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
2130with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
2131C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
2132charset.
2133
4fbdfdcf
MB
2134+++
2135** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
2136the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
2137message.
2138
6a0b0752
MB
2139** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
2140expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
2141
1c14ba45 2142+++
47e351a3
GM
2143** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
2144with the more general `:mask' property.
2145
1c14ba45 2146+++
ba9eeda1
GM
2147** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
2148
a2bd77b8
GM
2149** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2150backslash.
2151
424d8b44
DL
2152+++
2153** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2154is running in batch mode. For example,
2155
2156 (message "%s" (read t))
2157
2158will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2159to standard output.
2160
2161+++
2162** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2163`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2164
ead53494
GM
2165** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2166will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2167frame or window.
2168
f6499c03 2169+++
27848c01
GM
2170** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2171were added
2172
2173- Function: remove ELT SEQ
2174
2175Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
2176a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2177
2178- Function: remq ELT LIST
2179
2180Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
2181comparison is done with `eq'.
2182
1c14ba45 2183+++
27848c01 2184** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 2185
b548072f
GM
2186** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2187has been changed.
2188
424d8b44 2189+++
07b14857
KH
2190** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2191without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2192convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2193
1c14ba45 2194+++
9662da0b
GM
2195** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2196or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 2197
7fce7efb
DL
2198** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2199function was declared obsolete.
2200
1c14ba45 2201+++
5d94f558 2202** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
2203retained as an alias).
2204
f98d3086
SM
2205** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2206It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2207is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2208
87efd256
GM
2209** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2210
39b39373
GM
2211- Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2212
2213Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2214omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2215the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2216even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2217minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2218means never include the minibuffer window.
87efd256 2219
67c9a1d2
GM
2220** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2221
2222- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2223
2224Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2225
2226This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2227calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2228argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2229value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2230returned.
2231
2232Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2233if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2234it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2235minibuffer even if it is active.
2236
2237Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2238counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2239too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2240and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2241`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2242entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2243
2244ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2245ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2246ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2247ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2248ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2249If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2250Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2251
ead53494
GM
2252** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2253event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2254argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 2255
25fa6deb
GM
2256** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2257call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
2258message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2259Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 2260
5d94f558 2261** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
2262meaning no limit.
2263
5d94f558 2264** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
2265coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2266DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2267
9b2999d0
DL
2268+++
2269** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
2270list of a primitive.
de370c4c 2271
c286608e
SM
2272** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2273
9b2999d0 2274+++
80c05bd3
DL
2275** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2276buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2277This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2278than replacing the local map.
2279
4bc7a543
DL
2280** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
2281after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
2282
2283** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2284
f6499c03 2285+++
c286608e
SM
2286** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2287as promised long ago.
f0298744 2288
5d94f558 2289** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
2290\f
2291* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2292
2293Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2294--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2295When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2296so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2297
85c75536
MB
2298*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2299buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2300the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2301restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2302
0b8a3a6d
DL
2303*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2304`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2305when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
2306multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2307
2308*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2309`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2310contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2311
2312*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2313changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2314[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2315regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2316the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2317extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2318bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2319eight-bit-graphic.
2320
2321** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2322
2323A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
2324a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2325character set as previously.
2326
2327*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2328They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2329modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2330
2331CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2332characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2333range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2334case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2335
2336FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2337name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2338
2339*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2340registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2341"fontset-default".
2342
2343*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2344argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2345
2346** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2347composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2348buffers and strings.
2349
2350*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2351character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2352code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2353have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2354composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2355composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2356The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2357also been deleted.
2358
2359*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2360specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2361`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2362
2363*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2364MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2365composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2366may differ between buffer and string text.
2367
2368*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2369COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2370
2371*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2372directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2373Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2374`composition' from STRING.
2375
2376*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2377a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2378
2379*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2380obsolete.
2381
965bc065 2382** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
f620908e 2383`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' are introduced
965bc065 2384for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, U+2500..U+33FF,
f620908e 2385U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2386
2387** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2388`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2389X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2390
2391+++
2392** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2393are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 23940xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2395
399da7e3 2396+++
f0124b4a
DL
2397** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2398that offset in the file before writing.
2399
f98d3086
SM
2400** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2401compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2402
612839b6
GM
2403** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2404`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2405from which the command was issued.
2406
2407** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2408`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2409`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2410additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2411operate on.
2412
271b4185
GM
2413** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2414to `window-buffer-height'.
2415
2416- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2417
2418Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2419The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2420lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2421
2422Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2423respectively.
2424
2425If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2426COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2427
2428The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2429obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2430on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2431
2432Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2433buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2434possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2435is currently displayed in some window.
2436
3c30cb6e
DL
2437** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2438argument function's results.
2439
62f20204
GM
2440** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2441signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2442
c0510d27 2443** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2444header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2445
2446** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2447ignores differences in case and text representation.
2448
2449** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2450cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2451as follows:
2452
2453 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2454 nil don't display a cursor
2455 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2456 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2457 others display a box cursor.
2458
9a0dd3dc
GM
2459** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2460an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2461defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2462set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2463
d7b511c4 2464** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2465specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2466the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2467text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2468
2469Example:
2470
2471 (string-to-syntax "()")
2472 => (4 . 41)
2473
1fa28578
GM
2474** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2475other than 10.
2476
2477*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2478INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2479
5d94f558 2480 #b1111
1fa28578 2481 => 15
5d94f558 2482 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2483 => -15
2484
2485*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2486
5d94f558 2487 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2488 => 438
2489
2490*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2491
5d94f558 2492 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2493 => 48815
2494
2495*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2496
5d94f558 2497 #2R-111
1fa28578 2498 => -7
5d94f558 2499 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2500 => 267
2501
3d4ff2dd 2502** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2503the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2504and isn't a string.
2505
3d4ff2dd
GM
2506** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2507a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2508value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2509not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2510
16ce590d
DL
2511+++
2512** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2513
73825616 2514** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2515for a regexp in a string.
2516
2517** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2518`mouse-position-function'.
2519
723e779c
GM
2520** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2521that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2522
d1e103b2
GM
2523** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2524Keywords are now always considered constants.
2525
31047e0d
DL
2526+++
2527** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2528returns it.
2529
7a85e4df
GM
2530** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2531returned by function `recent-keys'.
2532
02b14400
RS
2533+++
2534** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2535can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2536Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2537etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2538mode.
404fa7d6 2539
02b14400 2540+++
8964fec7
SM
2541** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2542and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2543
02b14400
RS
2544+++
2545** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2546has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2547function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2548returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2549been performed."
2550
2551When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2552and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2553hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2554then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2555
02b14400 2556+++
81da8b32
GM
2557** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2558In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2559and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2560
02b14400 2561+++
9e207b90
GM
2562** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2563with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2564specified table.
2565
2566 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2567
2568Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2569TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2570saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2571what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2572
02b14400 2573+++
d7f89643 2574** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2575Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
601e0081
SM
2576Also backreferences like \2 are now considered as an error if the
2577corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
2578Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8964fec7 2579
02b14400 2580+++
dde9e75a
GM
2581** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2582removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2583
02b14400 2584+++
9da30515
GM
2585** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2586instead of being optional.
2587
02b14400 2588+++
d20679eb
GM
2589** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2590modify read-only text.
2591
02b14400 2592+++
fbc164de
PE
2593** New functions and variables for locales.
2594
2595The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2596decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2597time functions like strftime. The new variables
2598`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2599locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2600
2601The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2602environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2603the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2604environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2605not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2606`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2607`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2608
02b14400 2609+++
863476d1
SM
2610** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2611To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2612modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2613start sequences.
2614
02b14400 2615+++
ef6d912c
GM
2616** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2617because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2618
02b14400 2619+++
a933dad1
DL
2620** New function `propertize'
2621
2622The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2623strings with text properties.
2624
2625- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2626
2627Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2628by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2629PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2630specified value of that property. Example:
2631
2632 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2633
2634+++
2635** push and pop macros.
2636
02b14400
RS
2637Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2638are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2639as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2640
2641(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2642(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2643 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2644
02b14400
RS
2645** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2646
6c7fd5aa
RS
2647Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2648are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2649
2650(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2651 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2652 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2653 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2654
2655(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2656 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2657 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2658 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2659
a933dad1 2660+++
6c083b4c
GM
2661** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as
2662[:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character
2663class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period
2664or a sign.
a933dad1
DL
2665
2666[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2667[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2668[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2669[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2670[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2671 space, and DEL.
2672[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2673 and DEL.
2674[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2675 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2676 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2677[:alpha:] matches letters.
2678 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2679 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2680[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2681[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2682[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2683[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2684 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2685 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2686[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2687[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2688[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2689
2690+++
2691** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2692
2693The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2694
2695- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2696
2697The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2698are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2699
2700:test TEST
2701
2702TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2703Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2704it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2705
2706:size SIZE
2707
2708SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2709many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2710
2711:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2712
2713REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2714full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2715size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
27161.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2717old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2718
2719:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2720
2721THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2722hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2723(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2724
2725:weakness WEAK
2726
b548072f
GM
2727WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2728`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2729`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2730collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2731outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2732
2733- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2734
2735Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2736
2737- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2738
2739Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2740
2741- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2742
2743Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2744values are shared.
2745
2746- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2747
2748Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2749
2750- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2751
2752Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2753
2754- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2755
2756Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2757
2758- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2759
2760Returns the size of TABLE.
2761
d96d6bb0 2762- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2763
2764Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2765
2766- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2767
2768Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2769
2770- Function: clrhash TABLE
2771
2772Clear TABLE.
2773
2774- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2775
2776Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2777not found.
2778
79214ddf 2779- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2780
2781Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2782another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2783
2784- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2785
2786Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2787
2788- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2789
2790Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2791arguments KEY and VALUE.
2792
2793- Function: sxhash OBJ
2794
2795Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2796
2797- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2798
2799Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2800a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2801comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2802and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2803of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2804
2805TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2806
2807HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2808code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2809integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2810
2811Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2812be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2813
2814 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2815 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2816
2817 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2818 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2819
79214ddf 2820 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2821 'case-fold-string-hash))
2822
2823 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2824
2825+++
2826** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2827
2828It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2829circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2830a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2831
2832+++
2833** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2834
2835If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2836#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2837
a933dad1
DL
2838+++
2839** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2840t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2841specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2842is too short to reach that column.
2843
2844+++
2845** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2846now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2847after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2848two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2849
2850If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2851perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2852and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2853
2854+++
2855** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2856to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2857
2858+++
2859** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2860calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2861
2862+++
2863** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2864directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2865small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2866small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2867temporary-file-directory instead.
2868
2869+++
2870** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2871the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2872`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2873hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2874
2875+++
2876** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2877elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2878
2879+++
2880** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2881
2882make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2883creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2884ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2885
2886+++
2887** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2888
2889The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2890on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2891is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2892never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2893ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2894overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2895
2896If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2897that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2898to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2899The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2900
2901+++
2902** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2903
2904Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2905If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2906ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2907result string.
2908
2909Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2910string where arguments appear in the result string.
2911
2912Example:
2913
2914 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2915 (s2 "world"))
2916 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2917 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2918 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2919
2920results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2921
2922+++
2923** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2924
2925Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2926The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2927argument in it.
2928
2929 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2930 (arg "world"))
2931 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2932 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2933 (message msg arg))
2934
2935+++
2936** Sound support
2937
2938Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2939(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2940
2941Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2942(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2943to enable sound support.
2944
2945Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2946list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2947when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2948functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2949sound to play, before playing the sound.
2950
2951The following sound properties are supported:
2952
2953- `:file FILE'
2954
2955FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2956searched relative to `data-directory'.
2957
6fb40beb
GM
2958- `:data DATA'
2959
2960DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2961may be present, but not both.
2962
a933dad1
DL
2963- `:volume VOLUME'
2964
2965VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
29660..1. This property is optional.
2967
01242779
DL
2968- `:device DEVICE'
2969
2970DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
2971sound. The default device is system-dependent.
2972
a933dad1
DL
2973Other properties are ignored.
2974
01242779
DL
2975An alternative interface is called as
2976(play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
2977
a933dad1 2978** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4 2979
9b2999d0 2980+++
356673d4
DL
2981** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2982a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2983
2984** Changes to garbage collection
2985
2986*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2987of live and free strings.
2988
2989*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2990strings that have been consed so far.
2991
a933dad1 2992\f
04545643
GM
2993* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2994Lisp Manual
2995
f7eb32aa 2996+++
a299a6f0
GM
2997** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
2998mini-windows.
2999
9b2999d0 3000+++
26fcde61
MB
3001** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional
3002argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is
3003returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil.
ea4c1b7c 3004
a299a6f0 3005** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 3006
9a8d84ca
DL
3007+++
3008** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2 3009
9b2999d0 3010+++
2c69ced2
GM
3011** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
3012image.
3013
3014- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
3015
3016Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
3017
3018SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
3019measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
3020character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
3021font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
3022FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
3023
9b2999d0 3024+++
ebb8f116
GM
3025** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
3026has a mask bitmap.
3027
3028- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
3029
3030Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
3031FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
3032or omitted means use the selected frame.
3033
f6499c03 3034+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
3035** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
3036satisfying one of a list of specifications.
3037
3038+++
3039** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
3040optional.
3041
f6499c03
DL
3042+++
3043** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
3044below).
04545643
GM
3045
3046\f
a933dad1
DL
3047* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
3048
3049Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
3050--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
3051When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
3052so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
3053
f6d3257b
GM
3054** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
3055to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
3056
3057Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
3058text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
3059is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
3060your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
3061laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
3062just display it black instead.
3063
3064This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
3065a line like
3066
3067 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
3068
3069in your `.emacs'.
3070
a933dad1
DL
3071** New face implementation.
3072
3073Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
3074font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
3075
3076+++
3077*** New faces.
3078
3079Each face can specify the following display attributes:
3080
3081 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 3082
a933dad1
DL
3083 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
3084 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 3085
a933dad1 3086 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 3087
a933dad1 3088 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 3089
a933dad1 3090 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 3091
a933dad1 3092 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 3093
a933dad1
DL
3094 7. Background color.
3095
3096 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
3097
3098 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
3099
3100 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
3101
3102 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
3103
3104 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
3105 color.
3106
3107 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
3108 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
3109
3110Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
3111same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
3112frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
3113faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
3114with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
3115attributes mentioned above.
3116
3117There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
3118definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
3119created frames.
79214ddf 3120
a933dad1
DL
3121A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
3122have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
3123`fully-specified'.
3124
3125+++
3126*** Face merging.
3127
3128The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
3129combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
3130aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
3131properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
3132that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
3133results in a fully-specified face.
3134
3135+++
3136*** Face realization.
3137
3138After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
3139merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
3140realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
3141available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
3142face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
3143cache of the frame on which it was realized.
3144
3145Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
3146character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
3147for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
3148charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
3149
3150Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
3151specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
3152being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
3153the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
3154statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
3155
3156In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
3157`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
31580x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
3159the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
3160initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
3161Emacs.
3162
3163Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
3164`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
3165registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
3166with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
3167
a7c13351 3168+++
a933dad1
DL
3169**** Clearing face caches.
3170
3171The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3172on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3173unused fonts.
3174
3175+++
3176*** Font selection.
79214ddf 3177
a933dad1
DL
3178Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3179given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3180for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3181
3182If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3183pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3184family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3185property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3186an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3187
3188Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3189against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3190match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3191
3192Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3193
3194The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3195attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3196face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3197names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3198that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3199width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3200to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3201
52d89894
GM
3202Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3203alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
af4bb4c8
KH
3204doesn't exist.
3205
3206Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3207all alternative font registry names to try for a face speciying a
3208registry.
3209
3210Please note that the iterpretations of the above two variables are
3211slightly different.
3212
3213Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts.
3214
a933dad1
DL
3215
3216+++
3217**** Scalable fonts
3218
3219Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3220since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3221servers.
3222
3223To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 3224`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
3225scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3226Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3227scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3228that list. Example:
3229
3230 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3231
3232allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3233
3234+++
3235*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3236
3237- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3238
3239Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3240is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3241string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3242
3243If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3244the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3245FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3246POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3247SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3248These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3249if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3250REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3251the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3252of the face font sort order.
3253
79214ddf 3254- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
3255
3256Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3257omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3258(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3259non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3260
3261- Variable: font-list-limit
3262
3263Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3264won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3265matching font. The default is currently 100.
3266
3267+++
3268*** Setting face attributes.
3269
3270For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3271with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3272implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3273`face-attribute'.
3274
3275Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3276symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3277
3278The following attributes are recognized:
3279
3280`:family'
3281
3282VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3283or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3284and `?' are allowed.
3285
3286`:width'
3287
3288VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3289It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3290`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3291`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3292
3293`:height'
3294
787345ff
MB
3295VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3296in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3297scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3298height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
3299
3300`:weight'
3301
3302VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3303symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3304`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3305
3306`:slant'
3307
3308VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3309symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3310`reverse-oblique'.
3311
3312`:foreground', `:background'
3313
3314VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3315
3316`:underline'
3317
3318VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3319VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3320a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3321don't underline.
3322
3323`:overline'
3324
3325VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3326VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3327string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3328overline.
3329
3330`:strike-through'
3331
3332VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3333striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3334face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3335is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3336
3337`:box'
3338
3339VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3340around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3341VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3342of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3343and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3344VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3345:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3346the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3347specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3348defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3349the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3350color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3351should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3352like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3353that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3354the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3355box.
3356
3357`:inverse-video'
3358
3359VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3360inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3361
3362`:stipple'
3363
3364If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3365The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3366searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3367HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3368is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3369explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3370
3371For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3372and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3373
3374`:font'
3375
3376Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3377XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3378is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3379versions of Emacs.
3380
3381For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3382be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3383must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3384
3385Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3386`defface'.
3387
787345ff
MB
3388`:inherit'
3389
3390VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3391of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3392like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3393
a933dad1
DL
3394*** Face attributes and X resources
3395
3396The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3397from X resources:
3398
3399 Face attribute X resource class
3400-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3401 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3402 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3403 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3404 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3405 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3406 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3407 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3408 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3409 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3410 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3411 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3412 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3413 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3414 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3415 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3416 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3417 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3418 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3419 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3420
3421+++
3422*** Text property `face'.
3423
3424The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3425specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3426specification can be
3427
34281. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3429
34302. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3431 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3432 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3433 for face attribute names.
3434
34353. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3436 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3437 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3438
3439+++
3440** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3441
acf3ecb7
EZ
3442The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3443on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3444the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3445default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3446`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3447used to clear the mapping table.
3448
acf3ecb7
EZ
3449** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3450
3451The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3452and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3453type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3454color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3455display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3456old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3457`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3458compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3459should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3460modify their color-related behavior.
3461
3462The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3463any frame type.
3464
8a5719f0
EZ
3465** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3466
3467The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3468`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3469`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3470`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3471`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3472`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3473display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3474the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3475platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3476
a933dad1
DL
3477+++
3478** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3479
463cac2d 3480This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
3b51cca0
MB
3481To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
3482the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
3483`Inviolable' option.
a933dad1
DL
3484
3485The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3486end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3487Otherwise, it returns zero.
3488
463cac2d
GM
3489** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3490
3491There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3492buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3493property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3494
9a9dfda8 3495Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3496forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3497to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3498not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3499commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3500boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3501`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3502functions.
463cac2d
GM
3503
3504Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3505a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3506editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3507
9a9dfda8
GM
3508The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3509
59927f88 3510- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3511
3512Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3513
9a9dfda8
GM
3514A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3515If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3516constrained position if that is is different.
3517
3518If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3519positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3520ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3521constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3522as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3523is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3524fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3525the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3526also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3527
3528If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3529NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3530unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3531C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3532only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3533
59927f88
MB
3534If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3535a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3536
3537Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3538
3539- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3540
59927f88 3541Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3542A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3543If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3544
3545- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3546
3547Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3548A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3549If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3550If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3551field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3552
3553- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3554
3555Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3556A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3557If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3558If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3559then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3560
3561- Function: field-string &optional POS
3562
3563Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3564A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3565If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3566
3567- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3568
3569Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3570A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3571If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3572
a933dad1
DL
3573+++
3574** Image support.
3575
3576Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3577strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3578(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3579replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3580
3581If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3582`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3583AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3584window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3585area.
3586
3587IMAGE is an image specification.
3588
3589*** Image specifications
3590
3591Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3592is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3593specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3594symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3595described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3596
3597The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3598
3599`:ascent ASCENT'
3600
576da55d
GM
3601ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3602If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3603to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3604
3605If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3606image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3607
5d94f558 3608If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3609centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3610of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3611overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3612
3613`:margin MARGIN'
3614
79214ddf 3615MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3616margin around the image. Default is 0.
3617
3618`:relief RELIEF'
3619
3620RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3621around an image.
3622
3623`:algorithm ALGO'
3624
47e351a3
GM
3625Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3626
3627ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3628edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3629
3630ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3631apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3632nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3633position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3634around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3635neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3636transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3637x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3638below.
3639
3640 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3641 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3642 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3643
3644The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3645resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3646multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3647of the factors' absolute values.
3648
327652be 3649Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3650
47e351a3
GM
3651 (1 0 0
3652 0 0 0
3653 9 9 -1)
3654
3655Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3656
3657 ( 2 -1 0
3658 -1 0 1
3659 0 1 -2)
3660
ba9eeda1
GM
3661ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3662``disabled''.
3663
47e351a3
GM
3664`:mask MASK'
3665
3666If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3667the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3668image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3669background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3670image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3671the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3672GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3673image.
a933dad1 3674
47e351a3
GM
3675If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3676in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3677`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3678
3679`:file FILE'
3680
3681Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3682search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3683building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3684may be present in the image specification.
3685
518df5c4
GM
3686`:data DATA'
3687
3688Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3689supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3690present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3691support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3692
a933dad1
DL
3693*** Supported image types
3694
b246b1f6 3695**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3696
3697XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3698properties supported are
3699
3700`:foreground FG'
3701
3702FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3703is the frame's foreground.
3704
46c5af7f 3705`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3706
3707BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3708the frame's background color.
3709
3710XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3711case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3712instead of a `:file' property.
3713
3714`:width WIDTH'
3715
3716WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3717
3718`:height HEIGHT'
3719
3720HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3721
3722`:data DATA'
3723
3724DATA must be either
3725
3726 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3727 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3728
3729 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3730
3731 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3732 bitmap.
3733
c76e04a8
GM
3734 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3735 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3736 in the file.
3737
a933dad1
DL
3738**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3739
3740XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3741`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3742found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3743`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3744
3745Additional image properties supported are:
3746
3747`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3748
3749SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3750name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3751name.
3752
3753XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3754add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3755
a933dad1
DL
3756The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3757to display compressed images.
3758
3759**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3760
3761PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3762mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3763mono images are
3764
3765`:foreground FG'
3766
3767FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3768is the frame's foreground.
3769
3770`:background FG'
3771
3772BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3773the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3774
3775**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3776
3777Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3778package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3779are:
3780
a933dad1
DL
3781**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3782
3783Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3784package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3785properties defined.
3786
3787**** GIF, image type `gif'
3788
3789Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3790`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3791
3792Additional image properties supported are:
3793
3794`:index INDEX'
3795
3796INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3797multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3798
3799This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3800For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3801at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3802every 0.1 seconds.
3803
3804(defun show-anim (file max)
3805 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3806 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3807
3808(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3809 (when (= idx max)
3810 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3811 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3812 (save-excursion
3813 (set-buffer buffer)
3814 (goto-char (point-min))
3815 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3816 (insert-image img "x"))
3817 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3818
3819**** PNG, image type `png'
3820
3821Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3822package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3823properties defined.
3824
3825**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3826
3827Additional image properties supported are:
3828
3829`:pt-width WIDTH'
3830
3831WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3832integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3833
3834`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3835
3836HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3837must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3838
3839`:bounding-box BOX'
3840
3841BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3842the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3843files. This is an required property.
3844
3845Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3846lisp/gs.el.
3847
3848*** Lisp interface.
3849
79214ddf
FP
3850The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3851which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3852
3853Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3854they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3855The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3856manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3857images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3858
3859*** Simplified image API, image.el
3860
3861The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3862creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3863can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3864define an image based on available image types. The functions
3865`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3866buffer.
3867
3868+++
3869** Display margins.
3870
3871Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3872and images.
3873
3874To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3875`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3876`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3877obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3878`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3879the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3880of the display margins.
3881
3882You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3883containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3884one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3885string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3886in this file).
3887
3888+++
3889** Help display
3890
3891Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3892moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3893`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3894that have a `help-echo' property.
3895
9662da0b 3896If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3897is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3898the window in which the help was found.
3899
3900If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3901`help-echo' text property was found.
3902
3903If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3904POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3905
3906If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3907the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3908mouse.
d5aa31d8 3909
9662da0b
GM
3910If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3911string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3912
3913For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3914determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3915property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3916For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3917used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3918
3919The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3920the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3921causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3922
3923+++
3924** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3925
3926The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3927This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3928
3929The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3930scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3931The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3932scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3933used.
3934
79214ddf
FP
3935 (global-set-key [A-down]
3936 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3937 (interactive)
79214ddf 3938 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3939 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3940 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3941 #'(lambda ()
3942 (interactive)
79214ddf 3943 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3944 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3945
3946+++
3947** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3948
3949Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3950when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3951variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3952is called with one argument, POS.
3953
3954At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3955characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3956as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3957property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3958`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3959
3960+++
3961** Tool bar support.
3962
3963Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3964parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3965controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3966suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3967`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3968automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3969
3970*** Tool bar item definitions
3971
3972Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3973`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3974where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3975
a933dad1
DL
3976CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3977evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3978the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3979property (see below).
79214ddf 3980
a933dad1
DL
3981BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3982binding are currently ignored.
3983
3984The following properties are recognized:
3985
3986`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3987
a933dad1
DL
3988FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3989or disabled.
79214ddf 3990
a933dad1 3991`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3992
a933dad1 3993FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3994
a933dad1
DL
3995`:filter FUNCTION'
3996
3997FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3998FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3999used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 4000
a933dad1
DL
4001`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
4002
4003TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
4004and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 4005
a933dad1
DL
4006`:image IMAGES'
4007
4008IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
4009image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
4010meaning of each of the four elements:
4011
4012 Index Use when item is
4013 ----------------------------------------
4014 0 enabled and selected
4015 1 enabled and deselected
4016 2 disabled and selected
4017 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 4018
4ba7246d
GM
4019If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
4020algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
4021
a933dad1 4022`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 4023
a933dad1
DL
4024Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
4025is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
4026
dab96841 4027The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
4028toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
4029to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
4030menu bar.
dab96841 4031
8628686a
DL
4032The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
4033dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
4034buffer-locally to override the global map.
4035
a933dad1
DL
4036*** Tool-bar-related variables.
4037
4038If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
4039resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
4040than 1/4 of the frame's size.
4041
79214ddf 4042If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
4043raised when the mouse moves over them.
4044
4045You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
4046`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
4047pixels. Default is 1.
4048
4049You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
4050`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
4051
4052*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
4053
4054You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 4055a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
4056
4057 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
4058 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
4059 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
4060
4061is the original tool bar item definition, then
4062
4063 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
4064
4065makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
4066item.
4067
4068** Mode line changes.
4069
4070+++
4071*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
4072
4073The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
4074that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
4075a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
4076
40771. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
4078a `local-map' text property.
4079
40802. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
4081that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
4082
40833. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
4084is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
4085`local-map' property.
4086
4087The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
4088properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
4089example.
4090
54522c9f
GM
4091*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
4092evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
4093
a933dad1
DL
4094+++
4095*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
4096variable mode-line-format to nil.
4097
4098+++
4099*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
4100
4101This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
4102`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
4103completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
4104`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
4105line.
4106
4107The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
4108`header-line'.
4109
4110The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
4111position in the header-line.
4112
4113+++
4114** Text property `display'
4115
623a0aae
GM
4116The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
4117replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
4118also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
4119the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
4120below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
4121
623a0aae
GM
4122*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
4123
4124To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
4125text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
4126
4127If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
4128marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
4129the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
4130is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4131simpler form STRING as property value.
4132
a933dad1
DL
4133*** Variable width and height spaces
4134
4135To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
4136specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
4137`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
4138area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
4139marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
4140displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4141simpler form STRETCH as property value.
4142
4143The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
4144PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
4145properties described below.
4146
4147The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
4148characters having the `display' property.
4149
4150- :width WIDTH
4151
4152Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
4153character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
4154
4155- :relative-width FACTOR
4156
4157Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4158first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
4159same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
4160width of that character by FACTOR.
4161
4162- :align-to HPOS
4163
4164Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
4165value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
4166
4167Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
4168
4169- :height HEIGHT
4170
4171Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
4172normal line height.
4173
4174- :relative-height FACTOR
4175
4176The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
4177of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
4178
4179- :ascent ASCENT
4180
4181Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
4182used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4183baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4184equal to 100.
4185
4186You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4187
4188*** Images
4189
4190A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4191. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4192in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4193their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4194the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4195`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4196area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4197the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4198as display specification.
4199
4200*** Other display properties
4201
c9e73000 4202- (space-width FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4203
4204Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4205should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4206integer or float.
4207
c9e73000 4208- (height HEIGHT)
a933dad1
DL
4209
4210Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4211
4212If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4213means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4214the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4215``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4216a font is available counts as a step.
4217
4218If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4219as tall as the frame's default font.
4220
4221If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4222height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4223
4224Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4225`height' bound to the current specified font height.
4226
c9e73000 4227- (raise FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4228
4229FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4230font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4231raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4232amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
c9e73000 4233`height' subproperty.
a933dad1
DL
4234
4235*** Conditional display properties
4236
4237All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4238has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
4239applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
4240During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
4241the text having the `display' property.
4242
4243The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4244`(:when t SPEC)'.
4245
4246+++
4247** New menu separator types.
4248
4249Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4250item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4251treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4252to specify other menu separator types.
4253
4254- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4255
4256No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4257separator occurs.
4258
4259- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4260
4261A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4262
4263- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4264
4265A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4266
4267- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4268
4269A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4270
4271- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4272
4273A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4274
4275- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4276
4277A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
4278displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4279
4280- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4281
4282A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4283
4284- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4285
4286A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4287
4288- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4289
4290A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4291
4292- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4293
4294Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4295
4296- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4297
4298Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4299
4300- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4301
4302Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4303
4304- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4305
4306Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4307
4308Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4309the corresponding single-line separators.
4310
4311+++
4312** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4313
4314The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4315`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4316Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4317that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4318default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4319default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4320default foreground is black.
4321
4322The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4323(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4324`ScrollBarBackground').
4325
4326Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4327settings for scroll bar colors.
4328
4329+++
4330** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4331display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4332
4333---
4334** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4335starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4336on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4337line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4338the original window start.
4339
4340---
4341** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4342`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4343now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4344
4345+++
4346** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4347
4348A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4349`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4350windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4351other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4352
4353The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4354fixed-width and fixed-height.
4355
4356 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4357
4358A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4359fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4360window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4361change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4362temporarily to nil, for example
4363
4364 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4365 (enlarge-window 10))
4366
79214ddf 4367Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4368or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4369
4370** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4371terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4372to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4373overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4374horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4375support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4376
3787e12e 4377
79dfd2cd 4378\f
3787e12e
GM
4379* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4380
4381** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4382input.
4383
4384** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4385
4386** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4387
4388** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4389only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4390exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4391(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4392(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4393
4394** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4395been added.
4396
79dfd2cd 4397\f
3787e12e
GM
4398* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4399
4400** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4401
79dfd2cd 4402\f
3787e12e
GM
4403* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4404
4405** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4406M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4407\f
4408* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4409
4410** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4411
4412You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4413Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4414`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4415
4416If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4417is the one that is used.
4418
4419** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4420the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4421Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4422separate from the command's regular output.
4423Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4424says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4425In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4426the buffer name.
4427
4428When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4429output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4430it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4431cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4432
4433** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4434the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4435is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4436created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4437
4438** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4439example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4440match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4441quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4442
4443** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4444now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4445if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4446they never ignore case.
4447
4448** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4449under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4450applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4451of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4452just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4453convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4454part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4455
4456If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4457the same format that was used in the file before.
4458
4459You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4460`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4461
4462** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4463renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4464This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4465
4466** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4467The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4468buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4469your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4470is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4471end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4472Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4473
4474The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4475eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4476control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4477format. You can now customize these variables.
4478
4479** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4480filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4481filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4482enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4483
4484** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4485in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4486windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4487
4488** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4489dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4490doesn't have any effect.
4491
4492** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4493not one per buffer.
4494
4495** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4496use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4497 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4498
4499** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4500To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4501`auto-show-mode' command.
4502
4503** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4504avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4505versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4506choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4507occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4508
4509** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4510cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4511
4512** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4513character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4514feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4515
4516** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4517the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4518interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4519and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4520
4521** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4522
4523The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4524that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4525one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4526codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4527set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4528
4529Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4530from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4531
4532IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4533equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4534a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4535`?' on other systems.
4536
4537IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4538feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4539Unix.
4540
4541Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4542current codepage when it starts.
4543
4544** Mail changes
4545
4546*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4547`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4548appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4549non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4550MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4551headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4552latin-1:
4553
4554 MIME-version: 1.0
4555 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4556 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4557
4558*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4559default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4560default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4561sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4562buffer-file-coding-system.
4563
4564You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4565sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4566mail.
4567
4568*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4569if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4570Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4571list of possible coding systems.
4572
4573** CC Mode changes
4574
4575*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4576modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4577longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4578docstring for details.
4579
4580*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4581symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4582found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4583prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4584lineup functions use this feature currently.
4585
4586*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4587"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4588
4589*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4590"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4591
4592*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4593from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4594symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4595c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4596anonymous classes.
4597
4598*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4599syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4600
4601*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4602inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4603support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4604function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4605
4606*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4607(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4608brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4609c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4610(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4611
4612*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4613
4614*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4615
4616*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4617for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4618
4619*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4620
4621*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4622associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4623This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4624circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4625class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4626
4627** Gnus changes.
4628
4629*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4630added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4631Gnus manual for the full story.
4632
4633*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4634before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4635group, which is created automatically.
4636
4637*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4638values.
4639
4640*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4641
4642*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4643outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4644
4645*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4646`C-u C-c C-c'.
4647
4648*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4649
4650*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4651re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4652
4653*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4654
4655*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4656Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4657
4658*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4659`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4660
4661*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4662control over simplification.
4663
4664*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4665
4666*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4667limit.
4668
4669*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4670
4671*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4672
4673*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4674If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4675rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4676
4677*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4678`a' forces normal posting method.
4679
4680*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4681-- `W d'.
4682
4683*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4684to a non-nil value.
4685
4686*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4687where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4688
4689*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4690has been added.
4691
4692*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4693
4694*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4695
4696*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4697`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4698
4699*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4700`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4701
4702*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4703
4704*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4705been added.
4706
4707*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4708`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4709
4710*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4711updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4712
4713*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4714
4715*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4716
4717*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4718
4719** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4720
4721*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4722options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4723nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4724
4725*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4726TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4727of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4728TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4729can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4730
4731*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4732All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4733but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4734the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4735
4736*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4737the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4738buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4739mismatch.
4740
4741** Changes to RefTeX mode
4742
4743*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4744file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4745
4746*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4747lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4748characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4749removed from the label.
4750
4751*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4752a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4753
4754*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4755customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4756
4757*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4758`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4759expressions.
4760
4761*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4762
4763** New/deleted modes and packages
4764
4765*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4766SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4767
4768*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4769editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4770SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4771
4772*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4773changes with a special face.
4774
4775*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4776this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4777Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4778\f
4779* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4780
4781** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4782This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4783conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4784and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4785check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4786
4787The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4788Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4789distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4790
4791** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4792MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4793controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4794directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4795Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4796on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4797string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4798program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4799printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4800
4801** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4802output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4803available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4804input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4805temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4806program.
4807
4808An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4809and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4810programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4811automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4812as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4813ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4814
4815** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4816a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4817MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4818was not documented clearly before.
4819
4820** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4821This includes Tetris and Snake.
4822\f
4823* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4824
4825** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4826return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4827They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4828meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4829
4830** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4831WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4832and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4833
4834** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4835
4836*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4837It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4838
4839*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4840the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4841integers.
4842
4843** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4844files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4845arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4846file names and attributes are returned.
4847
4848** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4849sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4850accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4851It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4852returns the result.
4853
4854** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4855to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4856
4857** New functions for base64 conversion:
4858
4859The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4860into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4861performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4862optionally.
4863
4864Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4865job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4866
4867**
4868The new function process-running-child-p
4869will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4870terminal to its own child process.
4871
4872** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4873when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4874to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4875itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4876
4877** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4878be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4879
4880** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4881:included is an alias for :visible.
4882
4883easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4884easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4885to move or copy menu entries.
4886
4887** Multibyte editing changes
4888
4889*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4890an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4891make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4892work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4893char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4894 (setq char (sref str idx)
4895 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4896The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4897
4898If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4899(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4900 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4901
4902*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4903region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4904deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4905
4906 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4907
4908This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4909across the boundary.
4910
4911*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4912`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4913 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4914 contains 8-bit characters.
4915 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4916 contains invalid characters.
4917
4918*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4919text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4920preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4921text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4922way.
4923
4924*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4925If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4926end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4927prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4928
4929*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4930compose Thai characters in a string.
4931
4932** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4933argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4934for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4935menus should always use the third argument.
4936
4937** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4938read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4939arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4940input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4941
4942** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4943of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4944programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4945inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4946
4947** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4948the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4949returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4950echo area contents.
4951
4952 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4953
4954** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4955NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4956requested feature cannot be loaded.
4957
4958** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4959foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4960means to clear out that attribute.
4961
4962** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4963gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4964
4965** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4966read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4967unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4968end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4969
4970** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4971the gap of the current buffer.
4972
4973** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4974to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4975current buffer.
4976
4977** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4978facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4979These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4980it back in after any modifications have been made.
4981\f
4982* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4983
4984** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4985the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4986/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4987directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4988subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4989
4990Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4991names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4992Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4993which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4994these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4995
4996Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4997starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4998time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4999
5000This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
5001Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
5002to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
5003subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
5004`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
5005results.
5006
5007** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
5008GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
5009that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
5010fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
5011\f
5012* Changes in Emacs 20.3
5013
5014** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
5015including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
5016it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
5017perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
5018
5019** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
5020specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
5021region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
5022further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
5023command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
5024within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
5025are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
5026region.
5027
5028In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
5029selective undo.
5030
5031** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
5032unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
5033buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
5034effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
5035Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
5036
5037The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
5038though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
5039-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
5040load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
5041
5042** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
5043no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
5044enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
5045something that most users not do.
5046
5047** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
5048operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
5049The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
5050applications.
5051
5052C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
5053pasting operations.
5054
5055** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
5056setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
5057like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
5058printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
5059`ps-printer-name'.
5060
5061** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
5062minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
5063any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
5064except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
5065incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
5066hits a new word.
5067
5068Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
5069Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
5070to be confused by TeX commands.
5071
5072You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
5073correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
5074clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
5075of various alternative replacements and actions.
5076
5077Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
5078the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
5079corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
5080alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
5081flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
5082
5083Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
5084flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
5085
5086** Changes in input method usage.
5087
5088Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
5089the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
5090respectively.
5091
5092You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
5093
5094If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
5095of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
5096
5097The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
5098that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
5099
5100 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
5101
5102 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
5103
5104 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
5105 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
5106
5107 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
5108 given in the following case:
5109 o When you are using a complex input method.
5110 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
5111
5112If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
5113input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
5114and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
5115setting it to t is helpful.
5116
5117The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
5118
5119In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
5120keys:
5121 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
5122 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
5123 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
5124These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
5125environment.
5126
5127** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
5128names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
5129minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
5130get
5131
5132 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
5133
5134which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
5135
5136Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
5137Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
5138
5139** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
5140at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
5141its owner and group.
5142
5143** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
5144Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
5145
5146** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
5147contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
5148
5149** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
5150which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
5151in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
5152by the left edge of the rectangle.
5153
5154** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
5155increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
5156C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
5157for writing keyboard macros.
5158
5159** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
5160files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
5161frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
5162the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
5163additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
5164info.
5165
5166** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
5167
5168** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
5169query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
5170contents only.
5171
5172** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
5173confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
5174the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
5175says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
5176
5177** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
5178non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
5179literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
5180
5181** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
5182now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5183Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5184inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5185
5186** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5187failure if the command produces no output.
5188
5189** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5190manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5191the mouse.
5192
5193** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5194mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5195function and variable names.
5196
5197** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5198reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5199file-coding-system-alist.
5200
5201** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5202t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5203converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5204the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5205according to the current fontset.
5206
5207** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5208
5209The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5210that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5211nonascii-insert-offset.
5212
5213For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5214enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5215nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5216characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5217
5218** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5219an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5220
5221** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5222letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5223
5224** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5225are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5226command keys.
5227
5228** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5229user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5230
5231Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5232user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5233all variables that have documentation.
5234
5235** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5236shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5237that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5238minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5239it should show; the default is 20.
5240
5241Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5242the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5243of your input.
5244
5245** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5246all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5247recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5248argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5249the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5250Newly added options are included as well.
5251
5252If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5253then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5254for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5255
5256This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5257Customize menu.
5258
5259** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5260the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5261
5262** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5263buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5264invoked.
5265
5266** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5267that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5268The default is 1.
5269
5270** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5271syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5272new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5273(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5274sensibly.
5275
5276** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5277
5278** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5279value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5280two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5281
5282** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5283reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5284for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5285every night.
5286
5287** Desktop changes
5288
5289*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5290the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5291
5292*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5293and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5294
5295** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5296read and post multi-lingual articles.
5297
5298** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5299doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5300be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5301outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5302the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5303made invisible again.
5304
5305** Mail reading and sending changes
5306
5307*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5308the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5309changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5310toggle.
5311
5312*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5313now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5314summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5315the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5316rmail-default-body-file.
5317
5318*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5319longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5320handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5321
5322*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5323it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5324is evaluated to insert the signature.
5325
5326*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5327outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5328handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5329putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5330transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5331especially interested in trying feedmail.
5332
5333feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5334feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5335provided by feedmail are:
5336
5337**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5338stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5339there is also a queue for draft messages
5340
5341**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5342be prompted for confirmation
5343
5344**** does smart filling of address headers
5345
5346**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5347the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5348can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5349
5350**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5351the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5352/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5353function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5354
5355** Dired changes
5356
5357*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5358files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5359
5360*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5361run Dired on the directory name at point.
5362
5363*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5364files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5365for a specified regexp.
5366
5367** VC Changes
5368
5369*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5370conveniently.
5371
5372*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5373faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5374Dired.
5375
5376VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5377directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5378listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5379currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5380
5381You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5382then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5383vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5384control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5385on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5386
5387All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5388is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5389`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5390the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5391`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5392
5393The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5394toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5395VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5396`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5397
5398Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5399ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5400command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5401
5402*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5403file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5404session to resolve them.
5405
5406Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5407resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5408contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5409uses as well).
5410
5411*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5412command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5413you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5414either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5415branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5416If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5417using ediff.
5418
5419** Changes in Font Lock
5420
5421*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5422are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5423use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5424unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5425compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5426
5427** Frame name display changes
5428
5429*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5430frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5431raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5432when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5433
5434*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5435frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5436menu.
5437
5438** Comint (subshell) changes
5439
5440*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5441subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5442with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5443
5444*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5445
5446C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5447that is, the line after the last line you got.
5448You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5449
5450C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5451send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5452the following line.
5453
5454C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5455which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5456previously sent input.
5457
5458C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5459it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5460as the search string.
5461
5462*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5463automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5464
5465** C mode changes
5466
5467*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5468and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5469assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5470definition.
5471
5472*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5473(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5474Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5475style is still the default however.
5476
5477*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5478
5479*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5480are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5481them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5482
5483*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5484and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5485
5486*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5487namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5488
5489*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5490makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5491
5492*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5493c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5494
5495*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5496should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5497package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5498variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5499
5500** Changes to hippie-expand.
5501
5502*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5503non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5504which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5505
5506*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5507non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5508expanding dynamically.
5509
5510*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5511non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5512
5513*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5514non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5515this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5516expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5517
5518*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5519
5520** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5521
5522*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5523bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5524automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5525bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5526against the first word in the title.
5527
5528*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5529capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5530bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5531lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5532lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5533bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5534
5535*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5536generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5537replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5538bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5539
5540** Changes in vcursor.el.
5541
5542*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5543and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5544variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5545entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5546`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5547in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5548
5549*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5550Editing group once the package is loaded.
5551
5552*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5553generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5554vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5555
5556*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5557vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5558
5559** Ispell changes.
5560
5561*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5562buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5563are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5564
5565*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5566A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5567and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5568defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5569include:
5570
5571 o URLs are automatically skipped
5572 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5573
5574*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5575
5576** Changes to RefTeX mode
5577
5578RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5579large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5580re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5581section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5582
5583*** New recursive parser.
5584
5585The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5586entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5587recursive parser scans the individual files.
5588
5589*** Parsing only part of a document.
5590
5591Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5592partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5593the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5594
5595 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5596
5597*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5598
5599This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5600
5601 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5602
5603*** Using multiple selection buffers
5604
5605If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5606for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5607
5608 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5609
5610*** References to external documents.
5611
5612The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5613documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5614documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5615macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5616RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5617the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5618The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5619
5620*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5621
5622The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5623and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5624
5625Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5626the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5627
5628*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5629
5630The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5631buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5632
5633*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5634
5635The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5636contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5637`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5638have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5639enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5640at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5641more.
5642
5643*** Support for the varioref package
5644
5645The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5646
5647*** New hooks
5648
5649Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5650and citations are created. These hooks are
5651`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5652`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5653
5654*** Citations outside LaTeX
5655
5656The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5657a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5658
5659*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5660
5661The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5662fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5663fontified, use
5664
5665 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5666
5667** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5668With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5669the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5670directories that contain the same file name.
5671
5672Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5673Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5674file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5675Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5676have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5677names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5678directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5679directory.
5680
5681** New modes and packages
5682
5683*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5684It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5685it, but some do not.
5686
5687*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5688code.
5689
5690*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5691current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5692around in a buffer.
5693
5694Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5695
5696*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5697uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5698be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5699established system of notation similar to Chess.
5700
5701*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5702documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5703guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5704
5705*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5706available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5707system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5708simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5709functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5710the like.
5711
5712*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5713identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5714
5715*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5716within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5717used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5718the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5719
5720*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5721
5722 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5723 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5724 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5725 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5726 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5727 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5728 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5729 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5730 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5731 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5732 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5733
5734 Platform-specific modes:
5735
5736 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5737 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5738 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5739 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5740 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5741 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5742 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5743 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5744 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5745\f
5746* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5747
5748** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5749use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5750That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5751Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5752
5753Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5754you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5755consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5756
5757** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5758and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5759specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5760searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5761
5762** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5763multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5764character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5765environment.
5766
5767** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5768take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5769string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5770current input method for reading this one event.
5771
5772** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5773now control whether to output certain characters as
5774backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5775non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5776characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5777in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5778\f
5779* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5780
5781** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5782of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5783
5784** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5785in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5786always increases point by 1.
5787
5788The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5789considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5790
5791See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5792
5793** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5794Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5795default value changed. For example,
5796
5797 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5798 :type 'integer
5799 :group 'foo
5800 :version "20.3")
5801
5802 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5803 :version "20.3")
5804
5805If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5806default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5807is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5808`:version' in the top level group.
5809
5810This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5811
5812** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5813starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5814
5815However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5816symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5817support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5818to themselves.
5819
5820If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5821this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5822values whatever.
5823
5824** There is a new debugger command, R.
5825It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5826in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5827
5828** Frame-local variables.
5829
5830You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5831the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5832local bindings for that variable.
5833
5834These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5835frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5836modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5837parameter name.
5838
5839Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5840Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5841active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5842that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5843
5844It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5845clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5846very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5847through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5848
5849** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5850"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5851evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5852makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5853See the documentation in sregex.el.
5854
5855** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5856is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5857parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5858The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5859
5860** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5861If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5862
5863** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5864known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5865define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5866
5867** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5868when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5869it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5870history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5871
5872The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5873return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5874empty input.
5875
5876** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5877for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5878`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5879Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5880`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5881
5882** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5883echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5884a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5885default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5886
5887** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5888specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5889function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5890place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5891non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5892
5893** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5894If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5895up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5896end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5897
5898** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5899which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5900If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5901
5902** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5903holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5904was directed to display this buffer.
5905
5906** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5907with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5908describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5909other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5910set-window-configuration.
5911
5912** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5913window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5914positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5915windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5916
5917** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5918override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5919look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5920
5921If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5922non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5923map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5924
5925minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5926and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5927
5928** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5929except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5930
5931** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5932USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5933floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5934
5935** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5936to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5937in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5938it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5939
5940** Menu changes
5941
5942*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5943keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5944better supported.
5945
5946The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5947a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5948you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5949can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5950then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5951
5952*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5953
5954In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5955 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5956defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5957starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5958
5959The format is:
5960 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5961 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5962where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5963string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5964The supported properties include
5965
5966:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5967 item is enabled.
5968:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5969 item should appear in the menu.
5970:filter FILTER-FN
5971 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5972 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5973 It should return a binding to use instead.
5974:keys DESCRIPTION
5975 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5976 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5977 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5978:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5979 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5980 keyboard binding.
5981:key-sequence nil
5982 This means that the command normally has no
5983 keyboard equivalent.
5984:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5985:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5986 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5987 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5988 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5989
5990Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5991Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5992
5993(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5994
5995** New event types
5996
5997*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5998mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5999corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
6000which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
6001
6002 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
6003
6004where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6005same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
6006indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
6007negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
6008the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
6009forward, away from the user.
6010
6011As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6012
6013*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
6014files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
6015and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
6016filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
6017loaded into Emacs. The format is:
6018
6019 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
6020
6021where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6022same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
6023that were dragged and dropped.
6024
6025As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6026
6027** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
6028
6029*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
6030any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
6031to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
6032
6033*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
6034can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
6035that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
6036
6037*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
6038in Emacs 19 and before.
6039
6040The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
6041The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
6042
6043*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
6044buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
6045unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
6046representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
6047
6048This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
6049as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
6050viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
6051one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
6052will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
6053
6054This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
6055representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
6056(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
6057consistent with the new representation.
6058
6059*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
6060representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
6061about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
6062however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6063
6064The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
6065nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
6066using the table nonascii-translation-table.
6067
6068*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
6069representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
6070representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6071
6072The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
6073loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
6074is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
6075
6076*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6077which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
6078
6079*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6080which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
6081
6082*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
6083portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
6084so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
6085You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
6086
6087*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
6088it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
6089
6090*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
6091convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
6092buffer or string being searched.
6093
6094One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
6095[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
6096searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
6097searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
6098obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
6099you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
6100expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
6101
6102*** Structure of coding system changed.
6103
6104All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
6105by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
6106which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
6107as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
6108vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
6109your own alias name of a coding system by the function
6110define-coding-system-alias.
6111
6112The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
6113the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
6114access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
6115pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
6116character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
6117safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
6118'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
6119`iso-8859-1'.
6120
6121Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
6122The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
6123coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
6124(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
6125
6126Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
6127also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
6128are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
6129the other character sets and read it back correctly.
6130
6131*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
6132proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
6133This function requires a user interaction.
6134
6135*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
6136find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
6137select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
6138systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
6139a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
6140select-safe-coding-system.
6141
6142*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
6143decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
6144last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
6145was done.
6146
6147*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
6148used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
6149coding systems used by some specific language environment.
6150
6151*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
6152return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
6153characters are found, they now return a list of single element
6154`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
6155
6156*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
6157coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
6158coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
6159converted.
6160
6161*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
6162coding system for communicating with other X clients.
6163
6164*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
6165character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
6166character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
6167each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
6168either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
6169range of characters.
6170
6171*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
6172Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
6173
6174*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
6175in the current buffer at position POS.
6176
6177*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
6178input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
6179function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
6180character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
6181event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
6182binding input-method-function to nil.
6183
6184The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6185method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6186input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6187the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6188not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6189
6190The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6191subsequent events of a key sequence.
6192
6193*** You can customize any language environment by using
6194set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6195
6196The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6197customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6198instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6199environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6200exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
6201\f
6202* Changes in Emacs 20.1
6203
6204** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6205options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6206at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6207tree structure.
6208
6209M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6210user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6211
6212With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6213session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6214in your .emacs file.)
6215
6216** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6217You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6218
6219** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6220This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6221
6222** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6223immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6224kills the region.
6225
6226The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6227delete the character before point, as usual.
6228
6229** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6230on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6231by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6232
6233** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6234insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6235the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6236onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6237history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6238past.)
6239
6240** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6241This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6242in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6243TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6244makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6245
6246As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6247and is an alias for it.
6248
6249If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6250use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6251
6252** Scrolling changes
6253
6254*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6255position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6256
6257In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6258on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6259where it started.
6260
6261*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6262move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6263screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6264does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6265
6266*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6267top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6268comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6269recenters the window.
6270
6271** International character set support (MULE)
6272
6273Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6274including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6275Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6276Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6277features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6278MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6279
6280Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6281coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6282character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6283variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6284into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6285
6286Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6287generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6288supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6289language, to make it possible to type them.
6290
6291The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6292character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6293
6294The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6295to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6296
6297You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6298
6299 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6300
6301Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6302characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6303argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6304already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6305characters for their work until they want to change.
6306
6307*** Input methods
6308
6309An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6310specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6311has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6312the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6313support several input methods.
6314
6315The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6316another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6317work.
6318
6319A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6320characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6321composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6322consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6323sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6324letter.
6325
6326The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6327by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6328First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6329marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6330mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6331
6332None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6333they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6334phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6335converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6336
6337Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6338word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6339typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6340the first guess is wrong.
6341
6342*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6343turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6344
6345If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6346byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6347they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6348the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6349
6350However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6351use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6352includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6353translate automatically to and from either one.
6354
6355*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6356
6357Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6358file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6359sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6360what you want.
6361
6362If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6363example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6364system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6365multibyte characters in that buffer.
6366
6367If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6368character conversion as well.
6369
6370*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6371
6372A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6373Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6374requires using many fonts.
6375
6376Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6377collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6378
6379A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6380the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6381have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6382you would use a font.
6383
6384If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6385specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6386display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6387
6388The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6389(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6390characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6391or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6392and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6393
6394*** Defining fontsets.
6395
6396Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6397chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6398with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6399
6400Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6401of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6402`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6403standard fontset are created automatically.
6404
6405If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6406argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6407FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6408with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6409name is `fontset-startup'.
6410
6411Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6412The resource value should have this form:
6413 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6414FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6415 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6416 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6417 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6418The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6419of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6420CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6421FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6422
6423Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6424last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6425You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6426
6427For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6428font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6429following resource,
6430 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6431the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6432 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6433Here is the substitution rule:
6434 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6435 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6436 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6437 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6438 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6439
6440The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6441fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6442that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6443
6444With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6445like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6446name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6447fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6448fontsets.
6449
6450*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6451defaults for a particular choice of language.
6452
6453Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6454method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6455visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6456already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6457language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6458system for new files that you create.
6459
6460It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6461set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6462whole Emacs session.
6463
6464For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6465chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6466with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6467
6468*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6469specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6470specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6471the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6472coding systems that Emacs supports.
6473
6474*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6475lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6476This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6477After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6478is used for *the immediately following command*.
6479
6480So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6481write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6482
6483If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6484then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6485
6486For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6487visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6488
6489*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6490construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6491to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6492specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6493of the file.
6494
6495*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6496the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6497code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6498translated into that character code.
6499
6500This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6501various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6502
6503By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6504
6505*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6506the coding system for keyboard input.
6507
6508Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6509with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6510some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6511
6512By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6513
6514Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6515input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6516translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6517to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6518designed to work with terminals.
6519
6520*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6521specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6522This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6523has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6524translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6525in the corresponding buffer.
6526
6527By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6528
6529*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6530to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6531It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6532
6533*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6534an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6535command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6536want to use.
6537
6538C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6539method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6540
6541*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6542layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6543remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6544which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6545
6546*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6547the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6548related information.
6549
6550*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6551HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6552scripts.
6553
6554*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6555information about the support for a particular language.
6556You specify the language as an argument.
6557
6558*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6559the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6560first dash.
6561
6562A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6563(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6564whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
65651 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6566
6567 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6568 B big5 (Chinese)
6569 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6570 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6571 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6572 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6573 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6574 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6575 K euc-korea (Korean)
6576 R koi8 (Russian)
6577 Q tibetan
6578 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6579 T lao
6580 T tis620 (Thai)
6581 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6582 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6583 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6584 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6585 z hz (Chinese)
6586
6587When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6588two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6589coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6590keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6591
6592*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6593conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6594
6595When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6596into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6597rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6598Rmail files themselves.
6599
6600*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6601conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6602
6603Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6604for sending mail:
6605
6606- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6607- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6608- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6609 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6610- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6611
6612*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6613to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6614Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6615translations.
6616
6617** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6618of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6619insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6620without any conversion.
6621
6622** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6623You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6624RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6625any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6626
6627** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6628functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6629
6630Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6631Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6632
6633Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6634mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6635
6636** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6637complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6638in the buffer before point.
6639
6640With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6641symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6642you are using.
6643
6644With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6645just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6646
6647** File locking works with NFS now.
6648
6649The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6650in the same directory as FILENAME.
6651
6652This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6653works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6654can become a bottleneck.
6655
6656The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6657does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6658create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6659file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6660rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6661so useful that the change is worth while.
6662
6663When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6664are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6665collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6666tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6667
6668** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6669it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6670show-paren-mode.
6671
6672** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6673selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6674delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6675
6676** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6677within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6678complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6679
6680** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6681it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6682set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6683
6684** Changes in View mode.
6685
6686*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6687Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6688
6689*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6690view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6691
6692*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6693previous state.
6694
6695*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6696scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6697
6698*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6699non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6700not just the selected window.
6701
6702*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6703read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6704turns View mode on or off.
6705
6706*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6707how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6708delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6709
6710** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6711now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6712
6713** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6714has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6715presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6716which version to compare with.
6717
6718** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6719blocks if a match is inside the block.
6720
6721The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6722is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6723isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6724shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6725
6726By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6727of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6728blocks, all of them or none.
6729
6730** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6731current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6732confirmation first.
6733
6734** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6735now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6736However, the mode will not be changed if
6737(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6738(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6739 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6740(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6741
6742This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6743
6744However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6745these commands do not change the major mode.
6746
6747** M-x occur changes.
6748
6749*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6750it performs a case-sensitive search.
6751
6752*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6753if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6754using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6755
6756** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6757in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6758window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6759that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6760buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6761
6762** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6763after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6764appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6765come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6766
6767** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6768selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6769buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6770
6771** Outline mode changes.
6772
6773*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6774
6775*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6776
6777** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6778you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6779Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6780was already active.
6781
6782The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6783unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6784get confused by it.
6785
6786If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6787set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6788
6789** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6790
6791*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6792conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6793character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6794including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6795
6796The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6797mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6798copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6799
6800*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6801are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6802values.
6803
6804`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6805case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6806`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6807case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6808
6809** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6810certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6811can be. The default value is 30.
6812
6813** Changes in Mail mode.
6814
6815*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6816Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6817composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6818`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6819`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6820behavior.
6821
6822C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6823compose-mail-other-frame.
6824
6825*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6826the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6827replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6828buffer that shows the original message.
6829
6830*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6831with separator lines around the contents.
6832
6833*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6834in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6835definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6836need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6837
6838*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6839
6840**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6841for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6842controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6843Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6844
6845**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6846to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6847/etc/passwd.
6848
6849**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6850to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6851/etc/passwd.
6852
6853** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6854special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6855directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6856reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6857
6858Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6859when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6860be taken to be magic.
6861
6862** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6863files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6864available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6865
6866M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6867(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6868
6869** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6870suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6871
6872In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6873
6874new key dired.el binding old key
6875------- ---------------- -------
6876 * c dired-change-marks c
6877 * m dired-mark m
6878 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6879 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6880 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6881 * u dired-unmark u
6882 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6883 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6884 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6885 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6886 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6887 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6888
6889** Rmail changes.
6890
6891*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6892saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6893chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6894each time you run it.
6895
6896*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6897whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6898
6899*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6900messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6901means to move in the opposite direction.
6902
6903*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6904you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6905
6906*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6907just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6908It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6909can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6910for output.
6911
6912** Gnus changes.
6913
6914*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6915
6916*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6917Gnus.
6918
6919*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6920`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6921
6922*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6923article mode line.
6924
6925*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6926
6927*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6928
6929(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6930
6931*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6932are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6933`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6934
6935*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6936
6937*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6938
6939*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6940See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6941
6942*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6943Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6944used to pick articles.
6945
6946*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6947another have been added.
6948
6949 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6950
6951*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6952generating lines in buffers.
6953
6954*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6955`M-C-_'.
6956
6957*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6958
6959*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6960
6961 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6962
6963*** Scores can be decayed.
6964
6965 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6966
6967*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6968Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6969
6970*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6971the native server.
6972
6973 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6974
6975*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6976(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6977
6978*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6979
6980*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6981even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6982
6983*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6984(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6985
6986 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6987 a group.
6988
6989*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6990sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6991
6992 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6993
6994*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6995
6996 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6997
6998*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6999
7000 Use the `Y c' command.
7001
7002*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
7003
7004*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
7005
7006 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
7007
7008*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
7009from incoming mail before saving the mail.
7010
7011 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
7012
7013*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
7014
7015*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
7016the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
7017
7018 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
7019
7020Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
7021and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
7022from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
7023hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
7024this issue.)
7025
7026Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
7027automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
7028particular news group. This can be done by:
7029
7030 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
7031
7032Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
7033of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
7034"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
7035system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
7036for reading and posting).
7037
7038CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
7039 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
7040Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
7041newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
7042there.
7043
7044Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
7045default. Here are some of these default settings:
7046
7047 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
7048 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
7049 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
7050 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
7051 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
7052
7053When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
7054the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
7055
7056** CC mode changes.
7057
7058*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
7059code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
7060values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
7061this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
7062Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
7063loaded.
7064
7065If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
7066Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
7067style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
7068share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
7069c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
7070must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
7071
7072*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
7073of the current buffer.
7074
7075*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
7076it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
7077of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
7078
7079*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
7080style that the Python developers like.
7081
7082*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
7083This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
7084just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
7085
7086** VC Changes [new]
7087
7088** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
7089name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
7090directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
7091
7092This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
7093master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
7094developers.
7095
7096You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
7097RET in a buffer visiting that file.
7098
7099*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
7100other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
7101writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
7102calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
7103
7104*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
7105version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
7106
7107** Calendar changes.
7108
7109A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
7110of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
7111for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
7112
7113** ps-print changes
7114
7115There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
7116
7117*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
7118
7119The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
7120formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
7121`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
7122`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
7123It defaults to `letter'.
7124If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
7125
7126The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
7127of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
7128non-nil means "landscape" mode.
7129
7130The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
7131It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
7132It defaults to 1.
7133
7134*** Horizontal layout
7135
7136The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
7137`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
7138All are measured in points.
7139
7140*** Vertical layout
7141
7142The vertical layout is determined by the variables
7143`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
7144All are measured in points.
7145
7146*** Headers
7147
7148If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
7149`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
7150margin above the text.
7151
7152If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
7153framing box is printed around the header.
7154
7155The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
7156`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
7157
7158The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
7159`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
7160`ps-header-font-size'.
7161
7162*** Font managing
7163
7164The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
7165used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
7166`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
7167elements to this alist.
7168
7169The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
7170for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
7171
7172** hideshow changes.
7173
7174*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
7175C++, ; for lisp).
7176
7177*** Support for java-mode added.
7178
7179*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
7180in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
7181
7182*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
7183the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7184way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7185
7186*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7187robust and a lot faster.
7188
7189*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7190
7191*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7192to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7193documentation for more details.
7194
7195** Changes in Enriched mode.
7196
7197*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7198filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7199of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7200use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7201the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7202
7203*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7204distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7205as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7206as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7207
7208** Font Lock mode
7209
7210*** Custom support
7211
7212The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7213font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7214faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7215group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7216your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7217consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7218
7219You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7220
7221*** Maximum decoration
7222
7223Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7224default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7225of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7226supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7227to get the old behavior.
7228
7229*** New support
7230
7231Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7232
7233Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7234support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7235
7236*** Configurable support
7237
7238Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7239additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7240c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7241java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7242list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7243of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7244convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7245
7246Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
7247way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
7248it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7249
7250*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7251
7252You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7253highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7254for any mode.
7255
7256For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7257
7258 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7259
7260in your ~/.emacs.
7261
7262*** New faces
7263
7264Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7265font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7266distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7267to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7268
7269*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7270
7271The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7272cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7273same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7274
7275*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7276
7277The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7278according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7279the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7280non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7281refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7282the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7283Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7284
7285This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7286For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7287this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7288refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7289containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7290the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7291
7292As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7293
7294Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7295Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7296Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7297new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7298
7299If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7300settings.
7301
7302** Ada mode changes.
7303
7304*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
7305If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
7306procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
7307you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
7308stubs.
7309
7310*** There are two new commands:
7311 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7312 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7313
7314The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7315`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7316`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7317
7318*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7319is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7320Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7321
7322*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7323formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7324places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7325space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7326
7327** Scheme mode changes.
7328
7329*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7330mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7331for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7332with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7333have any effect.
7334
7335If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7336still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7337scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7338variables as buffer-local variables.
7339
7340*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7341Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7342
7343** Changes to the emacsclient program
7344
7345*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7346USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7347associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7348can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7349
7350*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7351it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7352buffer in Emacs.
7353
7354*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7355use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7356ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7357option takes precedence.
7358
7359** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7360constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7361(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7362
7363** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7364which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7365the current defun.
7366
7367** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7368following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7369
7370** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7371and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7372necessary).
7373
7374** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7375if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7376these register values no longer become completely useless.
7377If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7378asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7379it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7380
7381** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7382example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7383be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7384you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7385
7386You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7387variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7388file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7389revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7390only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7391
7392** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7393since it applies only to the current frame.
7394
7395** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7396file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7397and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7398
7399This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7400multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7401variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7402tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7403instead of just the file you are editing.
7404
7405** RefTeX mode
7406
7407RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7408and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7409different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7410multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7411turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7412
7413C-c ( reftex-label
7414 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7415 knows which kind of label is needed.
7416
7417C-c ) reftex-reference
7418 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7419 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7420
7421C-c [ reftex-citation
7422 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7423 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7424
7425C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7426 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7427
7428C-c = reftex-toc
7429 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7430 can quickly jump to every section.
7431
7432Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7433commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7434Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7435reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7436C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7437
7438** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7439
7440*** Info documentation is now available.
7441
7442*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7443both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7444
7445*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7446bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7447
7448*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7449(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7450
7451*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7452entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7453appropriate functions.
7454
7455*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7456entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7457
7458*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7459been cleaned.
7460
7461*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7462bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7463
7464*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7465shall be delimited.
7466
7467*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7468bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7469bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7470
7471*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7472field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7473prefixed with `ALT'.
7474
7475*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7476bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7477formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7478documentation).
7479
7480*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7481documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7482for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7483
7484*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7485comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7486
7487*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7488alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7489signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7490
7491*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7492
7493*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7494
7495*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7496from alien sources.
7497
7498*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7499to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7500crossref entries.
7501
7502*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7503region.
7504
7505*** Added support for imenu.
7506
7507*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7508of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7509`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7510`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7511
7512*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7513from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7514
7515** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7516
7517** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7518
7519** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7520functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7521Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7522as an argument.
7523
7524When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7525and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7526
7527** browse-url changes
7528
7529*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7530Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7531(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7532non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7533customization variables.
7534
7535*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7536
7537*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7538lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7539(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7540
7541** Changes in Ediff
7542
7543*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7544pops up the Info file for this command.
7545
7546*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7547the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7548merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7549directories).
7550
7551*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7552and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7553files in the same directory.
7554
7555*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7556The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7557related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7558
7559** Changes in Viper
7560
7561*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7562*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7563 instead of vip-.
7564*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7565*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7566Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7567*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7568*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7569*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7570color when Viper is in insert state.
7571*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7572Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7573viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7574
7575** Etags changes.
7576
7577*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7578default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7579Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7580variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7581not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7582
7583*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7584
7585*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7586constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7587
7588*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7589recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7590In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7591
7592*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7593C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7594recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7595methods and protocols.
7596
7597*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7598.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7599column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7600paragraph name.
7601
7602*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7603an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7604at least M times and as many as N times.
7605
7606** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7607in files has changed slightly.
7608
7609With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7610time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7611This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7612with old time-stamp-format values.
7613
7614In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7615(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7616This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7617reasons.
7618
7619In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7620natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7621fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7622(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7623time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7624specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7625
7626Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7627case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7628truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7629
7630The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7631being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7632future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7633recommended now will continue to work then.
7634
7635See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7636details.
7637
7638** There are some additional major modes:
7639
7640dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7641m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7642meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7643
7644** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7645copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7646into Emacs.
7647
7648** New Lisp packages include:
7649
7650*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7651
7652*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7653be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7654
7655*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7656
7657*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7658in shell buffers.
7659
7660*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7661See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7662and `elint-defun'.
7663
7664*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7665meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7666ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7667strings or comments.
7668
7669These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7670abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7671you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7672insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7673at these points.
7674
7675*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7676can visit them by short forms of their names.
7677
7678*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7679Emacs Lisp function at point.
7680
7681*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7682
7683*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7684switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7685
7686*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7687
7688*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7689
7690*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7691
7692*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7693from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7694
7695*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7696You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7697inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7698original place after inserting the copy.
7699
7700*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7701on the buffer.
7702
7703You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7704velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7705(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7706
7707Enable mouse-drag with:
7708 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7709-or-
7710 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7711
7712*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7713mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7714
7715*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7716It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7717
7718*** ogonek
7719
7720The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7721Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7722platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7723TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7724ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7725prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7726instance) and vice versa.
7727
7728To use this package load it using
7729 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7730Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7731 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7732 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7733The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7734ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7735
7736*** Interface to ph.
7737
7738Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7739
7740The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7741services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7742these servers.
7743
7744*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7745
7746*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7747You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7748while the real cursor does not move.
7749
7750*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7751for visiting your favorite web sites.
7752
7753*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7754so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7755
7756** movemail change
7757
7758Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7759mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7760supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7761user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7762
7763This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7764\f
7765* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7766
7767** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7768
7769Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7770end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7771Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7772file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7773file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7774
7775To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7776C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7777coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7778specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7779LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7780save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7781\f
7782* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7783
7784** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7785Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7786vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7787Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7788
7789** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7790to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7791
7792In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7793don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7794"win".
7795
7796** Basic Lisp changes
7797
7798*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7799evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7800
7801*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7802be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7803or by the user.
7804
7805The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7806
7807*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7808
7809(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7810(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7811
7812*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7813usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7814its argument.
7815
7816*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7817
7818*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7819
7820*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7821
7822*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7823error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7824include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7825`format' function.
7826
7827*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7828or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7829whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7830
7831*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7832either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7833adding one of these suffixes.
7834
7835*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7836which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7837If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7838
7839We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7840because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7841
7842*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7843
7844*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7845You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7846
7847*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7848conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7849
7850 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7851
7852BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7853BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7854
7855*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7856choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7857restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7858works using `save-current-buffer'.
7859
7860*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7861write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7862of the last form.
7863
7864*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7865which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7866last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7867as the last form.
7868
7869*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7870characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7871matches.
7872
7873For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7874
7875*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7876with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7877Then it returns that string.
7878
7879For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7880
7881(with-output-to-string
7882 (princ "The buffer is ")
7883 (princ (buffer-name)))
7884
7885returns "The buffer is foo".
7886
7887** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7888is non-nil.
7889
7890These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7891buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7892characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7893
7894*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7895a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7896
7897Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7898character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7899Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7900position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7901characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7902 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7903
7904ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7905Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7906non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7907characters".
7908
7909The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7910through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7911"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7912range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7913leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7914
7915*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7916(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7917multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7918character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7919
7920This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7921always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7922
7923However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7924
7925*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7926because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7927have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7928the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7929guaranteed.
7930
7931*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7932between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7933character).
7934
7935When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7936
7937 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7938 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7939 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7940 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7941 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7942
7943*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7944
7945*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7946`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7947more than the number of characters.
7948
7949You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7950it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7951\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7952is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7953follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7954newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7955
7956*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7957and returns a string containing those characters.
7958
7959*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7960(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7961counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7962character, sref signals an error.
7963
7964*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7965in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7966string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7967
7968*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7969in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7970region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7971
7972*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7973the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7974to a vector of the characters in it.
7975
7976*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7977of a string. You call it as follows:
7978
7979 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7980
7981This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7982STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7983This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7984Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7985it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7986
7987*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7988if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7989
7990*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7991if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7992
7993*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7994to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7995not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7996which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7997
7998(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7999
8000This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
8001
8002The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
8003If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
8004are not included in the resulting value.
8005
8006The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
8007at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
8008WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
8009is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
8010
8011If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
8012place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
8013character extends across that column), then the padding character
8014PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
8015string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
8016column START-COLUMN.
8017
8018*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
8019the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
8020necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
8021difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
8022changed text, before the change.
8023
8024*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
8025sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
8026one character set for each script, not for each language.
8027
8028**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
8029
8030**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
8031
8032**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
8033set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
8034
8035**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
8036name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
8037which identify the character within that character set.
8038
8039**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
8040byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
8041opposite of split-char.
8042
8043**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
8044of all the characters between BEG and END.
8045
8046**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
8047of all the characters in a string.
8048
8049*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
8050and specifying coding systems.
8051
8052**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
8053system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
8054of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
8055(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
8056and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
8057as what to do about code conversion.)
8058
8059**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
8060name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
8061
8062**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8063for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8064except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
8065
8066Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8067which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
8068to match against a file name.
8069
8070VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8071a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8072decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8073to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8074systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8075specifies the coding system for encoding.
8076
8077If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8078or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8079
8080**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
8081the coding system to use for network sockets.
8082
8083Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8084which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
8085either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
8086service names.
8087
8088VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8089a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8090decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8091to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8092systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8093specifies the coding system for encoding.
8094
8095If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8096or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8097
8098**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8099for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8100except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
8101start the subprocess.
8102
8103**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
8104systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
8105when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
8106(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
8107to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
8108
8109**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
8110coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
8111subprocess.
8112
8113It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
8114but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
8115start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
8116connection permanently or until overridden.
8117
8118The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
8119file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
8120network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
8121coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
8122It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
8123system for one operation at a time.
8124
8125**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
8126files, subprocesses or network connections.
8127
8128**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
8129coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
8130The value is a cons cell,
8131 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
8132where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
8133the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
8134input to the subprocess.
8135
8136**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
8137change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
8138
8139** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
8140customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
8141you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
8142
8143You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
8144variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
8145information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
8146legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
8147customization.
8148
8149Thus, instead of writing
8150
8151 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
8152 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
8153
8154you would now write this:
8155
8156 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
8157 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
8158 :type 'boolean
8159 :group foo)
8160
8161The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
8162two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
8163describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
8164for a description of them.
8165
8166The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
8167should belong to. You define a new group like this:
8168
8169 (defgroup ispell nil
8170 "Spell checking using Ispell."
8171 :group 'processes)
8172
8173The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
8174group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
8175but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
8176to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
8177second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
8178
8179Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
8180package should have just one group; a more complex package should
8181have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
8182package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8183first-level subgroups.
8184
8185** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8186
8187This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8188separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8189
8190** easy-mmode
8191
8192The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8193developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8194only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8195predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8196`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8197`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8198
8199** Text property changes
8200
8201*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8202text property.
8203
8204*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8205previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8206place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8207functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8208starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8209
8210If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8211LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8212of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8213position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8214
8215*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8216value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8217is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8218
8219** Changes in invisibility features
8220
8221*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8222hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8223is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8224should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8225would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8226make the overlay visible.
8227
8228During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8229invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8230needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8231which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8232the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8233t when it should hide it.
8234
8235*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8236
8237Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8238invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8239and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8240Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8241manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8242Here is an example of how to do this:
8243
8244 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8245 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8246 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
8247 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8248
8249 ...
8250 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8251
8252 ...
8253 ;; When done with the overlays:
8254 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8255 ;; Or respectively:
8256 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8257
8258** Changes in syntax parsing.
8259
8260*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8261`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8262obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8263`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8264
8265If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8266is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8267used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8268
8269When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8270character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8271
8272 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8273 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8274
8275 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8276 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8277 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8278
8279 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8280 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8281 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8282 determine the syntax type of the character.
8283
8284 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8285 of the current buffer.
8286
8287*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8288value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8289for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8290
8291*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8292and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8293only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8294character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8295another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8296
8297These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8298text property.
8299
8300*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8301arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8302of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8303
8304*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
8305(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
8306element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
8307nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
8308string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8309
8310*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8311syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8312`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8313
8314** Changes in face features
8315
8316*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8317if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8318
8319*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8320of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8321
8322*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8323set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8324
8325*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8326set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8327
8328*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8329by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8330and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8331the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8332overlay property).
8333
8334This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8335arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8336
8337** Changes in file-handling functions
8338
8339*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8340directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8341they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8342is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8343
8344This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8345begins with ~.
8346
8347*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8348it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8349
8350*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8351the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8352
8353*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8354as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8355
8356*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8357character code conversion as well as other things.
8358
8359Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8360(formerly it did not).
8361
8362*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8363environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8364
8365*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8366instead of constant strings.
8367
8368*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8369to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8370any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8371
8372substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8373in the same way as before.
8374
8375*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8376The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8377which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8378
8379*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8380error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8381else, and returns nil.
8382
8383*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8384directory cannot be listed.
8385
8386** Changes in minibuffer input
8387
8388*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8389read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8390additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8391argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8392ways:
8393
8394 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8395 It is available through the history command M-n.
8396
8397*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8398read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8399argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8400minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8401enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8402
8403In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8404argument in this way.
8405
8406*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8407from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8408minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8409
8410** Echo area features
8411
8412*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8413echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8414minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8415after the echo area is cleared.
8416
8417*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8418in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8419
8420** Keyboard input features
8421
8422*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8423set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8424
8425*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8426received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8427by keyboard macros.
8428
8429** Frame-related changes
8430
8431*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8432creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8433hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8434
8435*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8436the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8437has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8438
8439*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8440selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8441value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8442in the selected frame.
8443
8444*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8445is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8446which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8447
8448** X Windows features
8449
8450*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8451x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8452x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8453
8454*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8455The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8456
8457*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8458MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8459A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8460
8461If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8462it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8463
8464** Subprocess features
8465
8466*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8467functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8468automatically.
8469
8470*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8471and returns the output from the command as a string.
8472
8473*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8474and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8475
8476** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8477does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8478
8479** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8480at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8481goes after the other menu items.
8482
8483** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8484of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8485around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8486are in use.
8487
8488The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8489series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8490
8491Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8492after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8493form.
8494
8495** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8496is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8497but its hook is still run.
8498
8499** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8500for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8501
8502If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8503regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8504useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8505
8506This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8507are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8508filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8509warned.
8510
8511** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8512way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8513
8514** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8515integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8516functions like display-time.
8517
8518** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8519name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8520
8521** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8522can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8523is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8524
8525** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8526if there is an error in compilation.
8527
8528** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8529switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8530argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8531they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8532
8533** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8534Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8535the *scratch* buffer.
8536
8537** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8538The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8539where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8540e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8541
8542** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8543and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8544It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8545
8546** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8547using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8548variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8549and compose-mail-other-frame.
8550
8551** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8552can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8553full name of the specified user will be returned.
8554
8555** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8556of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8557where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8558in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8559option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8560files at all.
8561
8562** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8563and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8564width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8565the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8566
8567For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8568minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8569with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8570is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8571
8572** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8573
8574** imenu.el changes.
8575
8576You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8577item from menu created by imenu.
8578
8579An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8580#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8581select one of those items.
8582\f
8583* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8584\f
8585* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8586
8587** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8588mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8589
8590** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8591use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8592Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8593\f
8594* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8595
8596** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8597To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8598
8599** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8600conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8601matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8602expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8603word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8604all caps.
8605
8606** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8607at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8608
8609When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8610does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8611as in previous Emacs versions.
8612
8613** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8614non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8615time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8616frames.
8617
8618** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8619if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8620This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8621Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8622accident.
8623
8624** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8625keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8626It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8627line and then executing the macro.
8628
8629This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8630
8631** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8632(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8633characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8634characters.
8635
8636** Font Lock mode
8637
8638*** Font Lock support modes
8639
8640Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8641below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8642hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8643to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8644Font Lock mode is enabled.
8645
8646For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8647
8648 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8649
8650in your ~/.emacs.
8651
8652*** lazy-lock
8653
8654The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8655only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8656becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8657Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8658occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8659buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8660Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8661
8662To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8663
8664 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8665
8666To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8667
8668** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8669
8670*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8671paren and key.
8672
8673*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8674supported.
8675
8676** Gnus changes.
8677
8678Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8679commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8680significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8681previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8682
8683Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8684between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8685
8686*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8687variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8688obsolete.
8689
8690*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8691missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8692
8693 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8694
8695*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8696
8697 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8698
8699*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8700referred.
8701
8702*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8703
8704 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8705
8706*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8707
8708 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8709
8710*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8711buffers.
8712
8713 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8714
8715*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8716
8717 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8718
8719*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8720
8721 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8722
8723*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8724
8725 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8726
8727*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8728is possible.
8729
8730 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8731
8732*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8733groups of groups.
8734
8735*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8736
8737*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8738batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8739
8740*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8741
8742*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8743
8744*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8745
8746 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8747
8748*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8749expiration times.
8750
8751*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8752
8753*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8754process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8755
8756*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8757articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8758bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8759
8760*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8761articles with the `*' command.
8762
8763*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8764
8765*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8766
8767 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8768
8769*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8770
8771*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8772`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8773
8774*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8775buffer.
8776
8777*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8778
8779*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8780
8781*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8782
8783 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8784
8785*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8786
8787 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8788
8789*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8790
8791*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8792
8793*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8794
8795 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8796 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8797
8798*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8799refetching.
8800
8801 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8802
8803*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8804buffer to allow easier treatment.
8805
8806*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8807
8808*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8809
8810 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8811
8812*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8813articles.
8814
8815 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8816
8817*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8818
8819*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8820cited text to hide is now customizable.
8821
8822 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8823
8824*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8825
8826 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8827
8828*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8829
8830*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8831
8832The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8833in greater detail.
8834\f
8835* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8836
8837** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8838second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8839asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8840exists.
8841
8842** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8843as well as lists.
8844
8845** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8846of a given keymap.
8847
8848** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8849given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8850keymap or nil.
8851
8852** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8853an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8854name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8855menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8856equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8857alias.
8858\f
8859* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8860
8861** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8862
8863Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8864This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8865was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8866far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8867pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8868
8869For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8870you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8871`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8872
8873** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8874
8875The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8876do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8877It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8878much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8879chapter of the manual for details.
8880
8881However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8882customization variables take effect.
8883
8884** Marking with the mouse.
8885
8886When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8887highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8888using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8889
8890** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8891
8892*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8893
8894*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8895to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8896
8897*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8898in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8899you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8900application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8901applications, these problems are significant.
8902
8903If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8904likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8905However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8906will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8907other DOS application as a subprocess.
8908
8909Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8910You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8911
8912If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8913subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8914have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8915Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8916separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8917Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8918
8919** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8920
8921This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8922which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8923minibuffer contains.
8924
8925** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8926
8927The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8928It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8929It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8930affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8931
8932The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8933it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8934and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8935when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8936
8937** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8938enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8939
8940** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8941F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8942Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8943
8944If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8945menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8946something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8947the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8948
8949 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8950
8951** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8952to replace the characters it "deletes".
8953
8954** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8955
8956** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8957a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8958select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8959It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8960immediately after the selected one.
8961
8962This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8963made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8964
8965** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8966
8967Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8968directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8969If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8970Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8971recover-session.
8972
8973You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8974auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8975will not work.
8976
8977Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8978normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8979this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8980bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8981now that the bug is fixed.
8982
8983** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8984
8985There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8986when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8987Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8988which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8989
8990If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8991telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8992VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8993the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8994
8995** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8996Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8997is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8998
8999There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
9000Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
9001enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
9002The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
9003remain normal.
9004
9005** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
9006header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
9007
9008Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
9009known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
9010offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
9011Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
9012
9013Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
9014of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
9015a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
9016name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
9017documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
9018`mail-directory-stream'.)
9019
9020** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
9021skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
9022characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
9023with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
9024
9025Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
9026- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
9027wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
9028
9029The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
9030less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
9031headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
9032Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
9033Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
9034fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
9035to a limitation in font-lock).
9036
9037External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
9038
9039** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
9040buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
9041buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
9042this example:
9043
9044 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
9045 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
9046
9047** Changes in BibTeX mode.
9048
9049*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
9050
9051*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
9052
9053*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
9054
9055*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
9056entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
9057will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
9058isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
9059(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
9060The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
9061
9062*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
9063does the same job.
9064
9065*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
9066"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
9067
9068*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
9069text.
9070
9071** Font Lock mode
9072
9073*** Global Font Lock mode
9074
9075Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
9076new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
9077font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
9078turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
9079on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
9080
9081For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
9082
9083 (global-font-lock-mode t)
9084
9085in your ~/.emacs.
9086
9087*** Local Refontification
9088
9089In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
9090However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
9091those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
9092command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
9093
9094In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
9095(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
9096current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
9097above and below point.
9098
9099With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
9100
9101** Follow mode
9102
9103Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
9104buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
9105side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
9106they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
9107split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
9108follow-mode.
9109
9110M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
9111
9112To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
9113command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
9114
9115** hide-show changes.
9116
9117The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
9118to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
9119normal hooks.
9120
9121** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
9122The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
9123
9124** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
9125recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
9126those that begin a function, record, or macro.
9127
9128** MSDOS Changes
9129
9130*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
9131Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
9132
9133*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
9134and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
9135
9136*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
9137
9138*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
9139pressing both mouse buttons.
9140
9141*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
9142restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
9143are:
9144
9145**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
9146now works.
9147
9148**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
9149
9150**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
9151implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
9152
9153**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
9154
9155**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
9156
9157**** `M-x recover-session' works.
9158
9159**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
9160
9161**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
9162\f
9163* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
9164
9165** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
9166tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
9167remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
9168this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
9169behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
9170
9171** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
9172
9173The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
9174not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
9175need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
9176be different.
9177
9178It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
9179than `system-type'.
9180
9181See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
9182
9183** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
9184now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
9185
9186** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
9187that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
9188
9189** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
9190no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
9191reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
9192
9193The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
9194to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
9195like this:
9196
9197 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9198
9199SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
9200It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
9201becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
9202
9203REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
9204seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
9205means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
9206
9207*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
9208up if too much time passes.
9209
9210 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
9211
9212This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
9213If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
9214of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
9215form in BODY.
9216
9217*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
9218a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
9219call looks like this:
9220
9221 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9222
9223SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
9224runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
9225timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
9226ARGS.
9227
9228Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
9229command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
9230command.
9231
9232REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
9233time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
9234does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
9235each time Emacs becomes idle.
9236
9237If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
9238idle for SECS seconds.
9239
9240*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
9241all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
9242programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
9243instead.
9244
9245*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
9246there is no answer within a certain time.
9247
9248 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
9249
9250asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
9251within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
9252Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
9253
9254** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
9255arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
9256meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
9257arguments in between are ignored.
9258
9259This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
9260the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
9261
9262** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
9263/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
9264/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
9265site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
9266version.
9267
9268It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
9269version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
9270for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
9271has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
9272and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
9273problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
9274
9275** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
9276.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
9277systems with limited file name syntax.
9278
9279Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
9280convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
9281for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
9282completions.el:
9283
9284(defvar save-completions-file-name
9285 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
9286 "*The filename to save completions to.")
9287
9288This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
9289depends on the operating system, because the definition of
9290convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
9291Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
9292MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
9293
9294** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
9295rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
9296minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
9297
9298** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
9299marker from its buffer position.
9300
9301** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
9302Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
9303The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
9304
9305** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
9306that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
9307condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
9308of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
9309matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
9310regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
9311
9312This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
9313errors that happen often during editing.
9314
9315** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
9316into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
9317puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
9318
9319** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
9320now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
9321
9322** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
9323a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
9324name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
9325to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
9326and not get-buffer-window.
9327
9328** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
9329calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
9330being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
9331
9332If you use this feature, you should set the variable
9333buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
9334property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
9335non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
9336are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
9337property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
9338over and over for the same text.
9339
9340** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
9341
9342*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
9343in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
9344
9345;; @(#) HEADER: text
9346;; $HEADER: text $
9347
9348in addition to the normal
9349
9350;; HEADER: text
9351
9352*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
9353checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
9354lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
9355
9356
a933dad1 9357\f
3787e12e 9358* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
9359
9360----------------------------------------------------------------------
9361Copyright information:
9362
424d8b44 9363Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
9364
9365 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9366 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9367 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9368 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9369
9370 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9371 of this document, or of portions of it,
9372 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9373 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
9374\f
9375Local variables:
9376mode: outline
9377paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9378end: